THE Accessions, Shelf No. 36 LIBRARY OF 475 R83 The University of Minnesota. THE OR A PLAIN AND EASY INTRODUC TO LATIN GRAMMAR : WHEREIN THE PRINCIPLES OF THE LANGUAGE ARE METHODICALLY DIGESTED, BOTH IN ENGLISH AND LATIN. WITH USEFUL NOTES AND OBSERVATIONS, EXPLAINING THE TÉRMS OF GRAMMAR, AND FURTHER IMPROVING ITS RULES. BY THOMAS RUDDIMAN, M. A. UNIVERSEY ( THE TWENTY-FIFTH GENUINE EDITION, CAREFULLY CORRECTED AND IMPROVED, LIBRARY PHILADELPHIA : PUBLISHED BY JOHNSON & WARNER, NO. 147, MARKET-STREET. 1815. WILLIAM GREER…………..PRINTER, ADVERTISEMENT. THE many incorrect Editions of this Book published of late years, have occasioned much trouble and vexation to Instructors of Youth, who have therefore long wished to see an Edition ac- curately revised and corrected. To attain an object so impor- tant to Master and Scholar, the Proprietor of the Scotch Edition (from which this is carefully printed) obtained the assistance of the Rector of the Grammar School of Aberdeen: who has not only carefully compared this with the latest editions published in the Author's life time, and under his own inspection; but, by marking the quantity of the Penult Syllable, where it was most liable to be mistaken, bas also, it is hoped, made it easier for Beginners to acquire a just Pronunciation of the Language. J 3 1 6 4 1 G 006 YRAROLI THE RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE, OR, A PLAIN AND EASY INTRODUCTION TO LATIN GRAMMAR. PARS PRIMA. DE LITTERIS et SYLLABIS. Magister. QUOT sunt Literæ apud Latinos ? Discipulus. Quinque et vigin- ti; a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, l, m, n, o, p, q, r, s, t, u, v, x, y, z. M. Quomodo dividuntur? D. In vocales et consonan- tes. M. Quot sunt vocales? D. Sex; a, e, i, o, u, y. M. Quot sunt consonantes ? D. Novemdecim; b, c, d, f, g, h, j, k, l, m, n, p, q, r, s, t, V, X, Z. M. Quot sunt dipthongi ? | PART FIRST. Of Letters and Syllables, Master. 1 HOW many letters are there among the Latins? Scholar. Five and twenty; a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, l, m, n, o, p, q, r, s, t, u, v, x, y, z. M. How are they divided? S. Into vowels and conso- nants. M. How many vowels are there? S. Six; a, e, i, o, u, y. M. How many consonants are there? S. Nineteen; b, c, d, f, g, h, j, k, l, m, n, p, q, r, s, t, v. x, Z. M. How many dipthongs are there ? RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. D. Quinque; ae (vel œ), oe (vel œ), au, eu, ei: ut, aetas, vel atas; poena, vel poena, audio, euge, hei. S. Five; ae (or œ), œ (or œ), au, eu, ei: as aetas, or ætas, poena, or pana, audio, euge, hei. NOTES. GRAMMAR is the art of speaking any language rightly; as, Hebrew, Greek, Latin, English, &c. Latin grammar is the art of speaking rightly the Latin tongue. The Rudiments of that grammar are plain and easy instruc- tions, teaching beginners the first principles, or the most com- mon and necessary rules of Latin. The Rudiments may be reduced to these four heads; I. Treat- ing of letters. II. Of syllables. III. Of words. IV. Of sentences. These are naturally made up one of another; for one or more letters make a syllable, one or more syllables make a word, and two or more words make a sentence. A letter is a mark or character representing an uncompound- ed sound. K, Y, Z, are only to be found in words originally Greek; and H, by some, is not accounted a letter, but a breathing. We reckon the J, called Jod (or Je), and the V, called Vau, two letters distinct from I and U; because not only their figures, but their power or sounds, are quite different: Jsounding like Gbefore E, and almost like F. A vowel is a letter that makes a full and perfect sound by itself. A consonant is a letter that cannot sound without a vowel. A syllable is any one complete sound. There can be no syllable without a vowel; and any of the six vowels alone, or any vowel with one or more consonants before or after it, make a syllable. There are, for the most part, as many syllables in a word as there are vowels in it; only there are two kinds of syllables in which it is otherwise, viz. 1. When U, with any other vowel, comes after G, Q, or S; as in Lingua, Qui, Suadeo, where the sound of U vanishes, or is little heard. 2. When two vowels join to make a dipthong or double vowel. A dipthong is a sound compounded of the sounds of two vowels, so as both of them are heard. Of dipthongs, three are proper, viz. au, eu, ei, in which both vowels are heard; and two improper, viz. œ, œ, in which the a and o are not heard, but they are pronounced as e simple. PART II. OF WORDS. 5 Some, not without reason, to these five dipthongs add other three; as ai, in Maia, oi in Troia, yi or ui in Harpgia or Harpuia. PARS SECUNDA. De Dictionibus. M. QUOT sunt partes Ora- tionis ? PART SECOND. Of Words. M. HOW many parts of speech are there? D. Octo; Nomen, Pronomen, 'S. Eight; noun, pronoun, Verbum, Participium; Adverb- verb, participle; adverb, pre- ium, Præpositio, Interjectio, position, interjection, conjunc- Conjunctio. M. Quomodo, dividuntur? D. In Declinabiles et Indecli- nabiles. M. Quot sunt Declinabiles? D. Quatuor; Nomen, Prono- mem, Verbum, Participium. M. Quot sunt Indeclinabiles? D. Item quatuor; Adverbi- um, Præpositio, Interjectio, Conjunctio. tion. M. How are they divided? S. Into declinable and inde- clinable. M. How many are declinable ? S. Four; noun, pronoun, verb, participle. M. How many are indeclina- ble ? S. Likewise four; adverb, pre- position, interjection, conjunc- tion. A Word, (vox or dictio) is one or more syllables joined to- gether, which men have agreed upon to signify something. Words are commonly reduced to eight classes, called parts of speech: but some comprise them, all under three classes, viz. noun, verb, and adverb. Under noun they comprehend also pronoun and participle; and under adverb also preposition, in- terjection, and conjunction. Others, to these, add a fourth class, viz. adnoun, comprehending adjectives under it, and restricting nouns to substantives only. These by some are otherwise called names, qualities, affirmations, and particles. The declinable parts of speech are so called, because there is some change made upon them, especially in their last syllables; and this is what we call declension, or declining of words. But the indeclinable parts continue unchangeably the same. The last syllable on which these changes do fall, is called the ending or termination of words. These changes are made by what grammarians call accidentiaş i. e. the accidents of words. A-2 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. These accidents are commonly reckoned six, viz. gender, case, number, mood, tense, and person. Of these, gender and case are peculiar to three of the declinable parts of speech, viz. noun, pronoun, and participle; and mood, tense, and person are peculiar to one of them, viz. verb; and number is common to them all. NOTE 1. That person may also be said to belong to noun or pronoun; but then it is not properly an accident, because no change is made by it in the word. NOTE 2. That figure, species, and comparison, which some call accidents, do not properly come under that name, because the words have a different signification from what they had before. See chap. IX. NOTE 3. That the changes that happen to a noun, pronoun, and participle are in a stricter sense, called declension or declina- tion of them; and the changes that happen to a verb are called conjugation. CAP. I. De Nomine. M. QUOMODO declinatur nomen? D. Per genera, casus, et numeros. M. Quot sunt genera D. Tria: masculinum, fami- ninum, et neutrum. M. Quot sunt casus ? D. Sex; nominativus, geni- tivus, dativus, accusativus, vo- cativus, et ablativus. M. Quot sunt numeri ? D. Duo; singularis et plu- ralis. M. Quot sunt declinationes ? ·D. Quinque; prima, secun- du, tertia, quarta, et quinta. CHAP. I of Noun. M. HOW is a noun declined ? S. By genders, cases, and numbers. M. How many genders are there? S. Three; masculine, femi- nine, and neuter. M. How many cases are there ? S. Six; nominative, genitive, dative, accusative, vocative, and ablative. M. How many numbers are there? S. Two; singular and plu- ral. M. How many declensions are there? S. Five; first, second, third, fourth, and fifth. PART II. CHAP I. OF NOUN. 7 REGULÆ GENERALES. GENERAL RULES 1. Nomina neutrius generis 1. Nouns of the neuter gen habent nominativum, accusa- der have the nominative, accu- tivum, et vocativum, similes sative, and vocative, alike in in utroque numero: et hi ca- both numbers: And these cases sus in plurali semper desinunt in the plural end always in a. in d. 2. Vocativus in singulari plerumque, in plurali semper, est similis nominativo. 3. Dativus et ablativus plu- ralis sunt similes. 4. Nomina propria plerum- que carent plurali. 2. The vocative for the most part in the singular [and] al- ways in the plural, is like the nominative. 3. The dative and ablative plural are alike. 4. Proper names for the most part want the plural. A NOUN is that part of speech which signifies the name or quality of a thing; as Homo, a man; bonus, good. A noun is either substantive or adjective. A substantive noun is, that which signifies the name of a thing; as arbor, a tree; virtus, virtue; bonitas, goodness. An adjective noun is, that which signifies an accident, qua- lity, or property of a thing; as albus white; felix, happy; gravis, heavy. A substantive may be distinguished from an adjective these two ways: 1. A substantive can stand in a sentence without an adjective, but an adjective cannot without a substantive: as, I can say, A stone falls; but I cannot say, heavy falls. 2. If the word thing, be joined with an adjective, it will make sense; but if it be joined with a substantive, it will make nonsense. Thus we say, A good thing, A white thing; but we do dot say, A man thing, a beast thing. A substantive noun is divided into proper and appellative. A proper substantive is, that which agrees to one particular thing of a kind; as, Virgilius, a man's name, Penelope, à wo- man's name; Scotia, Scotland; Edinburgum, Edinburgh; Taus, the Tay. An appellative substantive is, that which is common to a whole kind of things; as, vir, a man; femina, a woman; regnum, a kingdom; urbs, a city; fluvius, a river. 8 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE, NOTE, That when a proper name is applied to many, it becomes an appellative, as, Duodecim Casăres, The twelve Cæsars. GENDER in a natural sense is the distinction of sex, or the difference between male and female: but in a grammatical sense we commonly understand by it, the fitness that a sub- stantive noun hath to be joined to an adjective of such a termi- nation, and not of another.-Therefore, Of the names of animals, the hes are of the masculine, and the shes of the feminine gender: but of things without life, and where the diversity of sex is not considered, even of things that have life, some are of the masculine, others of the feminine, and others of the neuter gender, according to the use of the best authors of the Latin tongue. Besides these three principal genders, there are reckoned also other three less principal, which are nothing else but compounds. of the three former, viz. The gender common to two, the gen- der common to three, and the doubtful gender. I. The common gender, or gender common to two (Genus commune, or Commune duûm), is masculine and feminine: and belongs to such nouns as agree to both sexes; as Parens, a father or mother; Bos, an ox or cow. II. The gender common to three, (Genus commune trium) is masculine, feminine, and neuter, and belongs only to adjec- tives: whereof some have three terminations, the first mascu- line, the second feminine, and the third neuter; as, Bonus, bo- na, bonum, good. Some have two, the first masculine and fe- minine, and the second neuter; as, Mollis, molle, soft. And some have but one termination, which agrees indifferently to any of the three genders; as, Prudens, wise. III. The doubtful gender (Genus dubium), belongs to such nouns as are found in good authors, sometimes in one gender, and sometimes in another; as, Dies, a day, masc. or fem. Vul- gus, the rabble, masc.. or neut. [We have excepted out of the number of genders the epicene or promiscuous gender; for, properly speaking, there is no such gender distinct from the three chief ones, or the doubtful. There are indeed epicene nouns, that is, some names of animals, in which the distinction of sex is either not at all, or very obscurely considered: And these are generally of the gender of their termi nation, as, Aquila, an eagle, femin. because it ends in a ; Pas- ser, a sparrow, masc. because it ends in er (See p. 12, and 15.). So, Homo, a man or woman, masc. Mancipium, a slave, neut. Anguis, a serpent, doubtful.] FART II. CHAP I, OF NOUN. 9 To distinguish these genders we make use of these three words, Hic, hæc, hoc; which are commonly though improperly called articles. Hic, is the sign of the masculine, hæc, of the feminine, hoc, of the neuter gender; Hic et hæc, of the common to two; hic, hæc, hoc, of the common to three; hic aut hæc, hic aut hoc, &c. of the doubtful. By CASES we understand the different terminations that nouns receive in declining; so called from cado, to fall, because they naturally fall or flow from the nominative, which is therefore called Casus rectus, the straight case; as the other five are named Obliqui, crooked. The singular number denotes one single thing; as, Homo, a man: the plural denotes more things than one; as, Homines, men. ¶ Before the Learner proceeds to the Declension of Latin Nouns, it may not perhaps be improper to give him a general view of THE DECLENSION OF ENGLISH NOUNS. I. The English language hath the two genders of nature, viz. Masculine and Feminine; for animals in it are called HE or SHE, according to the difference of their sex; and almost every thing without life is called IT. But because all the adjectives of this language are of one termination, it has no occasion for any other genders. II. The English, properly speaking, has no cases, because there is no alteration made in the words themselves, as in the Latin; but instead thereof we use some little words called PAR- TICLES. Thus the nominative case is the simple noun itself. The par- ticle OF put before it, or 's after it, makes the genitive; TO or FOR before it, makes the dative; the accusative is the same with the nominative; the vocative hath O before it; and the ablative hath WITH, FROM, IN, BY, &c. NOTE 1. That when a substantive comes before a verb, it is called the nominative; when it follows after a verb active, without a preposition intervening, it is called the accusative. NOTE 2.. The genitive of words ending in s or ss, or of plu- ral nouns ending in s, is expressed by adding the apostrophe; as, the soldiers' valour: for righteousness' sake: the muses' aid. NOTE 3. That TO, the sign of the dative, and O of the voca- tive, are frequently omitted or understood. 10 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. Besides these, there are other two little words called ARTI- CLES, which are commonly put before substantive nouns, viz. A (or AN before a vowel or H) called the indefinite article, and THE called the definite. A or AN signifies as much as the adjective one, and is put for it; as, a man, that is one man. The is used pronominally and signifies almost the same with this or that, and these or those. NOTE 1. That proper names of men, women, towns, kingdoms, and appellatives, when used in a very general sense, have none of these articles; as man is mortal, i. e. every man: God abhors sin, i. e. all sins: but proper names of rivers, ships, hills, &c. frequently have the: as, the Thames, the Britannia, the Alps. NOTE 2. That the vocative has none of these articles, and the plural wants the indefinite. NOTE 3. That when an adjective is joined with a substantive, the article is put before both; as a good man, the good man: and the definite is put before the adjective when the substantive is understood; as, the just shall live by faith, i. e. the just man. III. The English hath two numbers as the Latin, and the plu- ral is commonly made by putting an s to the singular; as, book, books. + Exc. 1. Such as end in ch, sh, ss, and x, which have which have es, added to their singular; as, church-es, brush-es, witness-es, box-es, Where it is to be noticed, that such words have a syllable more in the plural than in the singular number: which likewise hap- pens to all words ending in ce, ge, se, ze; as, faces, ages, houses, The reason of this proceeds from the near approach these terminations have in their sound to an s, so that their plural could not be distinguished from the singular, without the addition of another syllable. And, for the same reason, verbs of these terminations have a syllable added to them in their third per- son singular of the present tense. mazes. Exc. 2. Words that end in f, or fe, have their plural in ves; as, calf, calves; leaf, leaves; wife, wives: but not always; for hoof, roof grief, mischief, dwarf, strife, muff, &c. retain f. staff has staves. Exc. 3. Some have their plural in en; as, man, men; woman, women; child, children; chick, chicken; brother, brothers or brethren; (which last is seldom used except in sermons or in a burlesque sense.) PART II. CHAP I. OF NOUN. 11 Exc. 4. Some are more irregular; as, die, dice; mouse, mice; louse, lice; goose, geese; foot, feet tooth teeth; penny, pence; sow, sows, and swine; cow, cows, and kine. Exc. 5. Some are the same in both numbers; as, sheep, hose, swine, chicken, pease, deer; fish and fishes, mile and miles, horse and horses. NOTE, That as nouns in y do often change y into ie, so these have rather ies than ys in the plural; as, cherry, cherries. Singular. AN ENGLISH NOUN IS THUS DECLINED. Nom. Gen. of A, the King, King, Dat. to (for) King, Acc. King, Voc. O King, Plural. Nom. Gen. of The Kings, Kings, Dat. to (for) Kings, Acc. Kings, Voc. O Kings, Abl. with, from, in, byKing, Prima Declinatio. M. QUOMODO dignoscitur prima declinatio ? D. Per genitivum et dativum singularem in æ dipthongo. M. Quot habet terminationes ? D. Quatuor; a, e, as, es ; ut, Abl. with, from, in, by Kings. The first declension. M. HOW is the first declen- sion known'? S. By the genitive and dative singular in a dipthong. M. How many terminations hath it? S. Four; a, e, as, es; as, Penna, Penelõpe, Æneas, Anchises. Penna, a pen, Fem. Sing. Plur. Terminations. Nom. penna, Gen. pennæ, of a pen, Dat. pennæ, to a pen, Acc. pennam, Voc. penna, " pen, a pen, Nom. pennæ, Gen. pennārum, of pens, Dat. pennis, pens, a, œ, æ, arum. to pens, æ, is, O pen, Acc. pennas, Voc. pennæ, pens, | am, as, O pens, a, œ, Abl. penna, with a pen, Abl. pennis, with pens, a, is. ***After the same manner you may decline litera, a let- ter: via, a way; galea, an helmets tunica, a coat; toga, a gown. 12 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. + 1 A is a Latin termination; e, as and es are Greek. Nouns in a and e are feminine, in as and es masculine. RULE. Filia, a daughter; Nata, a daughter; Dea, a goddess; Anima, the Soul, with some others, have more frequently abus than is in their Dat. and Abl. plural, to distinguish them from masculine in us of the second declination. In declining Greek Nouns, observe the following Rules: 1. Greek nouns in as, [and a] have sometimes their Accusa- tive [with the Poets] in an; as Eneas, Eneam, vel Enean; Ossa, Ossam, vel Ossan. 2. Those in es have their accusative in en, and their vocative and ablative ine: as, Nom. Anchises, Voc. Anchise, Acc. Anchisen, Abl. Anchise. 3. Nouns in e, have their genitive in es, their accusative in en, their dative, vocative and ablative in e; as, Nom. Penelope, Dat. Penelope, Voc. Penelope, Abl. Penelope. Gen. Penelopes, Acc. Penelopen. [As to the dative of words in e, I have followed Probus and Priscian, among the ancients; Lilly, Alvarus, Vossius, Mes- sieures de Port Royal, Johnson, &c. among the Moderns. And though none of them cite any example, yet I remember to have observed three such Datives, viz. Cybele in Virg. Æn. XI, 768—— Penelope in Martial, Epig. XI. 8, 9; and Epigone in Reinesii Syntag. Inscrip. Class. 14. Num. 85. But Diomedes and Despauter seem to be of opinion, that these nouns have æin their dative. The reason that moved the former is, because they thought it incongruous, that seeing nouns in e generally follow the Greek, in all their other cases, they should follow the Latin in their da tive only, especially since their ablative, which answers to the Greek dative, ends in e. As, on the contrary, they maintain, that if such nouns have a in their dative, it must come from a nom- inative in a ; of which there are some examples yet extant: And then they may likewise have their accusative in am; as Penelopam, Circam, in Plautus; Lycambam in Terentianus Maurus. Thus He- lenæ or Helenes, Helenam or Helenen, are frequently to be met with in Poets, who also turn such words as commonly end in a into e in the nominative and vocative, when the measure of their verse re quires it. And here it may not be improper to remark, that even Greek words in es, have sometimes their nominative and voca- 1 PART II. CHAP I. OF NOUN. 13 in es, have sometimes their nominative and vocative in a, (whence comes their genitive and dative in æ). And, if Mr. Johnson's citations are right, both es and e have sometimes their accusative in em, Secunda Declinatio. M. QUOMODO dignoscitur secunda declinatio ? D. Per genitivum singula- rem in i, et dativum in o. M. Quot habet terminatio- nes ? D. Septem; er, ir, ur, us, um, os, on; ut, The Second Declension. M. HOW is the second de- clension known ? S. By the genitive singular in i, and dative in o. M. How many terminations hath it? S. Seven; er, ir, ur, us, um, os, on; as, Gener, a son-in-law; vir, a man; satur, full; dominus, a lord; regnum, a kingdom; synodos, a synod; Albion, the Island Albion, or Great-Britain. Sing. Nom. gener, Gener, a son-in-law, Masc. Plur. Terminations. Nom. generi, er, ir, us, i, Gen. genĕri, Dat. genero, Gen. generōrum, i, orum, Dat. generis, 0, is, Acc. generos, um, OS, er, ir, e, i, 0: is. Acc. generum, Voc. gener, Abl. genero: Voc. generi, Abl. generis, After the same manner you may decline puer, a boy; socer, a father-in-law; vir, a man, &c. But liber, a book; magister, a master; Alexander, a man's name; and most other substan- tives in er, lose the e before r: thus Sing. Nom. Liber, Gen, libri, Dat. libro, Acc. librum, Voc. liber, Abl. libro; Plur. Nom. libri, Gen. librorum, &c. Dominus, a Lord, Masc. Sing. Plur. Nom. dominus, Nom. domini, Gen. domini, Gen. dominorum, Dat. domino, Dat. dominis, Acc. dominum, Acc. dominos, Voc. domine, Voc. domini, Abl. domino, Abl. dominis, Thus, Ventus, the wind. Oculus, the eye. Fluvius, a river. Puteus, a well. Focus, a common fire. Rogus, a funeral pile. · - B 14 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. Regnum, a Kingdom, Neut. Sing. Gen. regni, Nom. regnum, Dat. regno, Acc. regnum, Voc. regnum, Plur. Nom. regna, Gen. regnorum, Dat. regnis, Acc. regna, Voc. regna, Abl. regno: Abl. regnis. REGULE 1. Nominativus in us facit vocativum in e; ut, ventus, vente. II. Propria nomina in žus perdunt us in vocativo; ut, Georgius, Georgi. Thus, Templum, a church. Ingenium, wit. Horreum, a barn. Canticum, a song. Jugum, a yoke. RULES. I. The nominative in us makes the vocative in e; as, ventus, vente. II. Proper names in ius lose us in the vocative; as, Geor- gius, Georgi. Filius hath also fili, and deus hath deus in the vocative; and in the plural more frequently dii and diis than dei and deis. The most common terminations of the second declension, are er and us of the masculine, and um of the neuter gender. There is only one noun in ir of this declension, viz. vir, a man, with its compounds, levir, duumvir, triumvir, &c. and only one in ur, viz. satur, full (of old saturus), an adjective. Os and on are Greek terminations, and generally changed into us and um in their nominative. These, with other Greek nouns us have sometimes their accusative in on. in [We have excluded the termination eus from this declension, as belonging more properly to the third; as, Orpheus, Orpheos, Orphei, Orphea, Orpheu: For when it is of the second declen- sion it is e-us of two syllables, and so falls under the termina- tion us; Orpheus, Orphe-i, (contracted Orphei and Orpi) Or- phe-o, Orpheum, (or Orphe-on, Orphe-o.] Tertia Declinatio. M. QUOMODO dignoscitur tertia declinatio ? D. Per genitivum singularem in is, et dativum in i. The Third Declension. M. How is the third declen- sion known ? S. By the genitive singular in is, and dative in i. PART II. CHAP I. OF NOUN. 15 M. Quot habet terminationes seu syllabas finales ? D. Septuaginta et unam. M. Quot habet Literas fina- les ? D. Undecim; a, e, o, c, d, l, 11, r, s, t, x: ut, M. How many terminations or final syllables hath it? S. Seventy and one. M. How many final letters hath it ? S. Eleven; a, e, n, c, d, l, n, r, s, t, x: as, Diadema, a crown; sedile. a seat; sermo, a speech; lac, milk; David, a man's name; animal, a living creature; pecten, a comb; pater, a father; rupes, a rock; caput, the head; rex, a king. Sing. Sermo, a Speech, Masc. Plur. Nom. sermones, Nom. sermo, Gen. sermonis, Gen. sermonum, Dat. sermoni, Dat. sermonibus, Acc. sermonem, Acc. sermones, Voc. sermo, Voc. sermones, Abl. sermone : Abl. sermonibus, Sedile, a Seat, Neut. Sing Plur. Nom. sedile, Nom. sedilia, Terminations. a, e, o, &c. es, a. is, um, ium. i, ibus. em, es, a. a, e, o, &c. es, a. e, i: ibus. As Sermo, so most substantives of this declension in a, o, c, d, n, t, x, Gen. sedilis, Gen. sedilium, er, or, ur, as, os, us, (except their Acc. and Voc. when they are neuters, Dat. sedili, Dat. sedilibus, or when they want the plural_num- Acc. sedile, Acc. sedilia, ber). Also (when they have more Voc. sedile, syllables in their Gen. than Nom.} Abl. sedili : Abl. sedilibus, all words, in es, and most of those Voc. sedilia, in is. Of the final letters of the third declension, six are peculiar to it, o, c, d, l, t, x, the other five are common to other declen- sions, viz. a, e, N, 1°, s. The copious final letters are, o, N, r, s, X. The copious final syllables are, io, do, go, en, er, or, as, es, is, os, us, ns, rs, ex. All nouns in a of this declension are originally Greek, and have always an m before it. There are only two words in c; lac, milk; and halec, a herring. Words in d are proper names of men, and very rare. There are only three words in t, viz. caput, the head; sinciput, the fore-head; occiput, the hind- head. 16 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. 11. The terminations er, or, os, o, n 2. The terminations io, do, go, as, es, is, ys, aus, x, and s after a consonant, 3. The terminations a, c, e, l, men, ar, ur, us, ut, But from these there are many exceptions. Masculine. >are Feminine. LN Neuter. NOTE 1. That for the most part the genitive hath a syllayble more than the nominative; and where it is otherwise, they generally end in e, es, or is. NOTE 2. That whatever letter or syllable comes before is in the gen. must run through the other cases [except the acc. and voc. sing. of neuters] as thema, -ătis, -ati, -ate, a theme; sanguis, -guinis, blood; iter, tineris, a journey; carmen, -minis, a verse; judex, dicis, a judge. REGULÆ. 1. Nomina in e, et neutra in al et ar, habent i in ablativo. 2. Quæ habent e tantum, in ablativo, faciunt genitivum plu- ralem in um. 3. Quæ habent i tantum, vel e et i simul, faciunt ium. 4. Neutra quæ habent e in ablativo singulari, habent a in nominativo, accusativo, et vo- cativo plurali. 5. At quæ habent i in abla- tivo, faciunt ža. RULES. 1. Nouns in e, and neuters in al and ar, have i in the abla- tive. 2. Those which have e only in the ablative, make their ge- nitive plural in um. 3. Those which have i only, or e and i together, make tum. 4. Neuters which have e in their ablative singular, have a in the nominative, accusative, and vocative plural. 5. But those which have i in the ablative, make ta. 1. EXCEPTIONS IN THE ACCUSATIVE SINGULAR. 1. Some nouns in is have im in the accusative; as, vis, 'vim, strength; tussis, the cough; sitis, thirst; buris, the beam of a plough; ravis, hoarseness; amussis, a mason's rule. To which add names of rivers in is; as, Tybris, Thamesis, which the poets sometimes make in in. 2. Some in is have em or im; as, navis, a ship; puppis, the stern; securis, an axe; clavis, a key, febris, a fever; pelvis, a bason; restis, a rope; turris, a tower; navem vel navim, &c. PART II. CTAP. I. OF NOUN, 17 婆 ​2. EXCEPTIONS IN THE ABLATIVE SINGULAR. 1. Nouns which have im in the accusative, have i in the abla- tive; as vis, vim, vi, &c. Those that have em or im have eor i; as navis, navem vel navim, nave vel navi. - 2. Canālis, vectis, bipennis, have i; avis, amnis, ignis, un- guis, rus, and imber, with some others, have e or i, but most commonly e. 3. These neuters in ar, have e; far, jubar, nectar, and hepar : Sal also has sale. 3. EXCEPTIONS IN THE GENITIVE PLURAL. 1. Nouns of one syllable in as, is, and s, with a consonant be- fore it, have ĭum; as, as, assium; lis, litium ; urbis, urbium. 2. Álso nouns in es and is, not increasing their genitive; as, vallis, vallium; rupes, rupium. Except penis, canis, vates, and volucris. 3. To which add caro, cor, cos, dos, mus, nix, nox, linter, sal, os, ossis. NOTE. That when the genitive plural ends in ium, the accu- sative frequently, instead of es, has eis, or is: as, omneis, par teis, or omnis, partis, for omnes, partes. OF GREEK NOUNS. 1. Greek nouns have sometimes their genitive in os. And these are 1. Such as increase their genitive with d: as Arcas, Arcădis vel Arcados, an Arcadian; Briseis, -eidis, vel -eidos, a woman's name. 2. Such as increase in os pure i. e. with a vow- el before it, as hæresis, -eos, vel -ios, a heresy. 3. To these add Sphyngos, Strymōnos, and panos. NOTE. That is is more frequent, except in the second kind, and patronymics of the first. II. 1. Greek words which increase their genitive in is or os not pure, (i. e. with a consonant before it) have frequently their accusative sing. in a and plural in as; as Lampas, lampădis, lampada, lampadas; also, Minos, Minois, Minoa; Tros, Trois, Troa, Troas; Heros, herōis, heroa, heroas. 2. Words in is or ys, whose genitive ends in os pure, have their accusative in im or in, and ym or yn; as Horesis, -eos, hæresim or -in; Chelys, -lyos, a lute; chelym or -lyn. Of words in is, which have their genitive in dis or dos, masculings have their accusative for the most part in im or in, seldom in dem, and never in da, that I know of: as paris, parim vel parin, vel 1 B 2 18 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. parĭdem: Feminines have most commonly dem or da, and seldom im or in; as Briseis, Briseidem vel Briseida. III. Feminines in o have us in their genitive, and o in their other cases; as Dido, Didus, Dido, &c. or they may be declin- ed after the Latin form, Didonis, Didoni, &c. which Juno (as be- ing of a Latin original) always follows. IV. Greek nouns in's frequently throw away s in their voca- tive; as Calchas, Achilles, Paris, Tiphys, Orpheus: Calcha, Achil- le, Pari, Tiphy, Orpheu. V. Greek nouns have um, (and sometimes on in their geni- tive plural; as Epigrammaton Hœreseón), and very rarely ium. VI. Greek nouns in ma, have most frequently is in their da- tive and ablative plural; as Poema, Poemătis, because of old they said Poëmatum, -ti. Bos has Boum, and bobus or bubus. Quarta Declinatio. M. QUOMODO dignoscitur quarta declinatio ? D. Per genitivum singula- rem in us, & dativum in ui. M. Quot habet terminatio- nes ? D. Duas: us and u; ut, The Fourth Declension. M. How is the fourth de- clension known? S. By the genitive singular in us, and the dative in ui, M. How many terminations hath it ? S. Two; us and u; as, Fructus, Fruit; Cornu, a Horn. Fructus, Fruit, masculine. Plural. Nom. fructus, Singular. Terminations. Nom. fructus, us, us. Gen. fructus, Gen. fructuum, us, uum. Dat. fructibus, Dat. fructui, Acc. fructum Voc. fructus, Abl. fructu: Singular. Nom. cornu, Gen. cornu, Dat. cornu, Acc. cornu, Voc, cornu, Acc. fructus, Voc. fructus, Abl. fructibus. Cornu, a Horn, Neut. Plural. Nom. cornua, Gen. cornuum, Dat. cornibus, Acc. cornua, Voc. cornua, All. cornu : Abl. cornibus. I ui, ibus. um, us. us, us. u: ibus. As fructus, so vultus, the countenance; manus, the hand, Fem. Casus, a fall or chance. As cornu so genu, the knee; Veru, a Spit; Tonitru, thunder. PART II. CHAP. I. OF NOUN. 19 Nouns in us of this declension are generally masculine, and those in u all neuter, and indeclinable in the singular number. RULE. Some nouns have ŭbus in their dative and ablative plural, viz. Arcus, a bow; artus a joint, lacus, a lake; Acus, a needle; portus, a port or harbour; partus, a birth; tribus, a tribe; veru, a spit. NOTE. That of old nouns of this declension belonged to the third, and were declined as, grus, gruis, a crane; thus, fruc- tus, fructuis, fructui, fructuem, fructue; Fructues, fructuum fruc- tuibus, fructues, fructues, fructuibus. So that all the cases are contracted, except the dative sing. and genitive plural. There are some examples of the genitive in uis yet extant, as, on the contrary, there are several of the dative in u. The blessed name JE- Sus, is thus declined. Singular. Nom. Jesus, Gen. Jesu, Domus, a house, femenine, is thus declined. Singular. Nom, domus, Plural. Nom. domus, Gen. domûs, v. -mi, Gen. domorum, v. -uum, Dat. domui, v. -mo, Dat. Dat. Jesu, Acc. Jesum, Acc. domum, Voc. Jesu, Abl. Jesu. Abl. domo, Voc. domus, domibus, Acc. domos, v. -us, Voc. domus, Abl. domibus. NOTE. That the genitive domi is only used when it signifies at home: domo, the dative, is found in Horace, Epist. I. 10, 13. Quinta Declinatio. M. QUOMODO dignoscitur quinta declinatio ? D. Per genitivum and dati- vum singularem in ei. M. Quot habet terminatio- nes ? D. Unam, nempe es; ut, Singular. Nom. res, Gen. rei, Dat. rei, Acc. rem, Voc. res, Abl. re: The fifth declension. M. How is the fifth declen- sion known? S. By the genitive and da- tive singular in ei. M. How many terminations hath it P 'S: One, namely es: as, Res, a Thing, Fem. Plural. Nom.res, Gen. rerùm,. Dat. rebus, Acc. res, Voc. res, Abl.' rebus. Terminations. es, es. ei, erum, ei, ebus. em, es, es, es, e: ebus.. 20 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. Nouns of the fifth declension are not above fifty; and are all feminine, except dies, a day, masc. or fem, and meridies, the mid-day or noon, masc. All nouns of this declension end in ies, except three: Fides, faith; spes, hope; res a thing. And all nouns in ies, are of the fifth, except these four; ab- ies, a fir-tree; aries a ram; paries, a wall; and quies, rest; which are of the third. Most nouns of this declension want the genitive, dative, and ablative plural ; and many of them want the plural altogether. GENERAL REMARKS ON ALL THE DECLENSIONS. 1. The genitive plural of the first four is sometimes con- tracted, especially by poets; as, Coelicolùm, Deûm, Mensûm, Currûm; for Coelicolarum, Deorum, Mensium, Curruum. 2. When the genitive of the second ends in ii, the last i is sometimes taken away by poets; as, Tuguri, for Tugurii. We read also, Aulãi for aulæ, in the first; and fide for fides in the fifth; and so of other like words. Declinatio Adjectivorum, ADJECTIVA sunt vel pri- mæ et secunda declinationis, vel tertiæ tantum. Omnia adjectiva habentia tres terminationes (præter* un- decim) sunt primæ et secundæ At quæ unam vel duas termina- tiones habent, sunt tertiæ. The Declension of Adjectives. ADJECTIVES are either of the first and second declension, or of the third only. All adjectives having three terminations (except* eleven) are of the first and second; : but those which have one or two terminations are of the third. Adjectives of the first and se- cond have their masculine in Adjectiva primæ et secundæ habent masculinum in ust vel er; femininum semper in a;ust or er; their feminine always neutrum semper in um ; ut, in a ; and their neuter always in um; as, Bonus, bona, bonum, good; Tener, tenĕra, tenerum, tender. Viz. Acer, alăcer, celer, celeber, saluber, volucer, campes- ter, equester, pedester, paluster, silvester: which are of the third, and have their masculine in er or is, their feminine in is, and neuter in e. † For satur, full, was of old satŭrus. PART II. CHAP. I. OF NOUN. 21 Bonus, bona, bonum, good. Plural. Singular. Nom. bon-us, -a, -um, Nom. bon-i, -a, Gen. bon-i, -æ, -i, Dat. bon-o, -æ, -0, Gen. bon-orum, -arum, -orum, Dat. bon-is, -is, -is, Acc. bon-um, -am, -um, Acc. bon-os, -as, -a, Voc. bon-e, -a, -um, Voc. bon-i, -∞, -a, Abl. bon-o, -a, -0: Abl. bon-is, -is, -is. Těner, tenera, tenerum, tender. Sing. Plural. N. těn-er, -ěra, -ĕrum, N. ten-ĕri, -ĕræ, -ĕra G. ten-ĕri, -eræ, D. ten-ero, -eri, G. ten-erorum, -erarum, -erorumf, -eræ, -ero, D. ten-eris, -eris, -eris, A. ten-erum, -eram, -erum, A. ten-eros, -eras, -era, -erum, V. ten-eri, -eræ, -era, -ero: A. ten-eris, -eris, -eris. V. ten-er, -era, A. ten-ero, -era, Adjectives are declined as three substantives of the same ter- minations and declensions: As in the examples above, bonus, like dominus; tener, like gener; bona, and tenera, like penna; bonum, and tenerum, like regnum. Therefore the ancients, as is clear from Varro, lib. 3. de Anal. declined every gender sepa- rately, and not all three jointly, as we now commonly do: And perhaps it may not be amiss to follow this method at first, espe- cially if the boy is of a slow capacity. Of adjectives in er, some retain the e, as tener. So miser, -era, -erum, wretched; liber, -era, -erum, free; and all com- pounds in ger, and fer, others lose it, as, pulcher, pulchra, pul- chrum, fair; niger, gra, grum, black. These following adjectives, unus, one; totus, whole; solus, alone; ullus, any; nullus, none; alius, another of many; alter, another, or one of two; neuter, neither; uter, whether, with its compounds; uterque, both; uterlibet, utervis, which of the two you please; alteruter, the one or the other; have their genitive singular in ius, and dative in i. Adjectiva tertiæ declinationis. | Adjectives of the third declen- 1. Unius terminationis. sion. 1. Of one termination. 22 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. Felix, happy. Singular. -ix, N. felices, -īcis, -ici, N. fél-ix, -ix, G. fel-icis, --īcis, D. fel-ici, -ici, A. fel-icem, -icem, -ix, V. fel-ix, -ix, -ix, A. fel-ice, vel -ici, &c. Plural. -ices, -īcia, G. fel-icium, -icium, -icium, D. fel-icibus, -icibus, -icibus, A. fel-ices, -ices, -icia, V. fel-ices, -ices, -icia, A. fel-icibus, -icibus, -icibus. 2. Of two terminations. Plural. N. mites, mites, mitia, G. mitium, mitium, mitium, D. mitibus, mitibus, mitibus, A. mites, mites, mitia, V. mites, mites, mitia, A. mitibus, mitibus, mitibus, 2. Duarum terminationum. Mitis, mite, meek. Singular. N. mītis, mitis, mite, D. miti, G. mitis, mitis, miti, mitis, miti, A. mitem, mitem, mite, V. mitis, mitis, mite, A. miti, miti, miti: Singular. -or, Mitior, mitius, meelcer. Plural. -us, N. miti-ōres, -ōres, -ōra, G. miti-orum, -orum, -ora, D. miti-oribus, -oribus, -oribus, A. miti-ores, -ores, -ora, V. miti-ores, -ores, -ora, A. miti-oribus, -oribus, -oribus. 3. Of three terminations. N. miti-or, G. miti-ōris, -ōris, -ōris, -ōris, D. miti-ori, -ori, -ori, A. miti-orem, -orem, -us, V. miti-or, -or, A. miti-ore, vel-ori, &c. 3. Trium terminationum. -us, Acer vel acris, acris, acre, sharp. Singular. N. a-cer, vel -cris, -cris, G. a-cris, D. a-cri, -cris, -cri, 1|:: 1: Plural. -cres, -cria, -cre, N. a-cres, cris, G. a-crium, -crium, -crium, cri, D. a-cribus, -cribus, -cribus, -crem, -cre, A. a-cres, -cres, -cria, V. a-cer, vel -cris, -cris, -cre, V. a-cres, -cres, A. a-crem, A. a-cri, -cri, REGULÆ. -cria, cri: A. a-cribus, -cribus, -cribus. 1. Adjectiva tertia declina- tionis habent e vel i in ablativo singulari. 2. At si neutrum sit in e, ab- lativus habet i tantum. RULES. 1. Adjectives of the third de clension have e or i in the abla- tive singular. 2. But if the neuter be in e, the ablative has i only. PART II. CHAP I. OF NOUN. 23 in 3: Genitivus pluralis desinit; 3. the genitive plural ends ium; neutrum nomina- ium and neuter of the nominative, accusative, and vo- cative in ia. tivi, accusativi, et vocativi, in ia. 4. Excipe comparativa, quæ um et a postulant. comparatives, 4. Except which require um and a. EXCEPTIONS. 1. Dives, hospes, sospes, superstes, juvenis, senex, and pauper, have e in the ablative singular, and consequently um in the genitive plural. 2. Compos, impos, consors, inops, vigil, supplex, uber, de- gener, and puber; also compounds ending in ceps, fex, pes, and corpor; as princeps, artifex, bipes, tricorpor, have um not ium. NOTE. That all these have seldom the neut. singular, and never almost the neut. plural in the nom. and acc. To which add memor, which has memori and memorum, and locuples, which has locupletium: also deses, reses, hebes, perpes præpes, teres, concolor, versicolor; which being hardly to be met with in the genitive plural, 'tis a doubt whether they should have um or ium, though I incline most to the former. 3. Par has pări; vetus, vetĕra, and veterum; plus (which hath only the neut. in the sing.) has plure, and plures, (or pluria) pluriúm. NOTE 1. That comparatives, and adjectives in ns, have more frequently e than i, and participles in the ablatives called abso- lute have generally e; as, carolo regnante, not regnanti. NOTE. 2 That adjectives joined with substantives neuter hardly ever have e but i, as, victrīci ferro, not victrice. NOTE 3. That adjectives when the are put substantively, have oft-times e; as, affinis, familiaris, rivalis, sodālis, &c. So par, a match; as. Cum pare quæque suo coëunt. Ovid. OF NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 1. THE ordinal and multiplicative numbers (see Chap. IX.) are regularly declined. The distributive want the singular, as also do the cardinal, except unus, which is declined as in p. 16. and hath the plural, when joined with a substantive that want- eth the sing. as, une literæ, one letter; una monia, one wall; or when several particulars are considered complexly, as making 24 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. one compound; as, Uni sex dies, i. e. One space of six days; Una vestimenta, i. e. One suit of apparel. Plaut. N. duo, Duo and tres are declined after this manner : Plural. duæ duo, G. duōrum, duārum, duōrum, D. duobus, duabus, duobus, A. duos v. o, duas, V. duo, duæ, duo, duo, Plural. N. tres, tres, tria, G. trium, trium, trium, D. tribus, tribus, tribus, A. tres, tres, tria, V. tres, tres, tria, tribus, tribus A. duobus, duabus, duobus. A. tribus, Ambos, both, is declined as duo. 2. From quatuor to centum are all indeclinable. 3. From centum to mille they are declined thus, ducenti, du- centæ, ducenta; ducentorum, ducentarum, ducentorum, &c. 4. As to mille, Varro, and all the grammarians after him down to the last age, make it (when it is put before a gen. plur.) a substantive indeclinable in the sing. and in the plur. declined, millia, millium, millibus; but when it hath a substantive joined to it in any other case, they make it an adjective plural indeclin- able. But Scioppius, and after him Gronovius, contend that mille is always an adjective plural; and under that termination of all cases and genders; but that it hath two neuters, hæc mille, and hæc millia; that the first is used when one thousand is sig- nified, and the second when more than one. And that, where it seems to be a substantive governing a gen. multitudo, numerus, manus, pecunia, pondus, spatium, corpus, or the like, are under- stood. I own that formerly I was of this sentiment; but now the weighty reasons adduced by the most accurate Perizonius incline me rather to follow the ancient grammarians. it After the declension of substantives and adjectives separately, may not be improper to exercise the learner with some exam- ples of a substantive and adjective declined together; which will both make him more ready in the declensions, and render the de- pendence of the adjective upon the substantive more familiar to him.-Let the examples at first be of the same terminations and declensions; as, Dominus justus, a just lord; Penna bona, a good pen; Ingenium eximium, an excellent wit: afterwards let them be different in one or both; as, Puer probus, a good boy; Lectio fa- cilis, an easy lesson; Poeta optimus, an excellent poet; Fructus dulcis, sweet fruit; Dies faustus, a happy day, &c. And if the boy has as yet been taught writing, let him write them either in the school, or at home, to be revised by the master next day. PART II. CHAP I. OF NOUN. .25 OF IRREGULAR NOUNS. THESE (for we cannot here make a full enumeration of them) may be reduced to the following scheme : 1. Number, Sing. as, Liberi, Mina, Arma. 2 Plur. as, Aër, Humus, Ævum. "Nom. and Voc. Ditionis. Gen. 2. Cases, Dat. Voc. or having only IRREGULAR NOUNS are, 2. VARIABLE. 1. Too much. In gender hav- ing Sing. 1. DEFECTIVE. 2. Adjectives. Wanting. 1. Substantive. Wanting. 3. REDUNDANT. 1. Gender, 2. Number, 3. Case, Sing. as, Chaos. Plus. Ego. Gen. Dat. and Abl. Plur. as Mel, Three; as, Dica, dicam, dicas: Two; as, Suppetie, Suppetias. One; as, Dicis, Inficias, Noctu. Mas. as, Cætera, cæterum. Fem. as, Quisquis, quicquid. Neut. as, Compos. Mas. and Fem. as, Plus. Mas. and Neut. as, Sicelis. Fem and Neut. as, Tros. Plur. as, Unusquisque. 2 Sing. as, Centum. Voc. as, Nullus. Dat. and Abl. as, Tantundem. having the vocative only; as, Macte, Macti. Masc. Masc. Fem. Neut. Neut. Neut. and Plural. In Declension be- ing of the 2. Too little, as, clinables. In Termination, In Gender, In Declension, Neut. as, Manalus, Menala. Mas. and Neut. as, Locus, -ci, & -ca. Neut. as, Carbasus, Carbasa. Mas. as, Cœlum, cœli. Fem. as, Epulum, epulæ. M. and N. as, Frenum, -ni, and -na. 2. and 1. as, Delicium, delicia. 2. and 4. as, Laurus, -ri, and -rus. 3. and 2. as, Vaɛ, -sis, -sa, -sorum. Inde-Saltogether; as, Fas. in the Sing. as, Cornu. C fonly; as, Helena, Helene. and Gender; as, Tignus, tignum. and Decl. as, Materia, materies. Gend, and Decl. as, Æther, æthra. only; as, hic and hoc Vulgus. only; as, Fames, fumis, of the 3d, Abl. fume, of the 5th, because the last syllable is always long with the poets. 26 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. NOTE 1. That the defective nouns are not so numerous as is commonly believed. NOTE 2. That those which vary too little, may be ranked un- der the defective; and those which vary too much, under the re- dundant, e. g. cœli, cœlorum, comes not from cœlum, but from cœlus; and vasa, vasorum, not from vas, vasis, but from vasum, vasi: but custom, which alone gives laws to all languages, has dropt the singular, and retained the plural; and so of others. DE COMPAR ATIONE. M. QUOT sunt gradus com- parationis ? D. Tres; positivus, compar- ativus, and superlativus. M. Quota declinationis sunt hi gradus ? D. Positivus est adjectivum. primæ et secundæ declinatio- nis, vel tertiæ tantum; com- parativus est semper tertiæ; superlativus semper prima and secundæ. M. Unde formatur compar- ativus gradus ? D. A proximo casu, positivi in i, addendo pro masculino and fœminino syllabam or, et us pro neutro ; ut, OF COMPARISON. M. HOW many degrees of comparison are there ? S. Three; the positive, com- parative, and superlative. M. Of what declension are these degrees? S. The positive is an adjec- tive of the first and second de- clension, or third only; the com- parative is always of the third; the superlative always of the first and second. M. Whence is the compar- ative degree formed ? · S. From the next case of the positive in i, by adding for the masculine and feminine the syl- lable or, and us for the neuter; as Doctus, learned; gen. docti, doctior, and doctius, more learned mitis, meek, Dat. miti; mitior and mitius, more meek. M. Unde formatur superla- tivus ? D. 1. Si positivus desinat in er, superlativus formatur ad- dendo rimus: ut. M. Whence is the superla- tive formed? S. 1. If the positive ends in er, the superlative is formed by ¡ adding rĭmus: as, Pulcher, fair, pulcherrimus, most fair; pauper, poor, pauper- Timus, most poor. PART II. CHAP. I. OF NOUN. 27 2. Si positivus non desinat in er, superlativus formatur proximo casu in i, addendo ssi- mus; ut, Gen. Docti doctissimus, most learned: Dat. miti mitissimus, most meek. 2. If the positive ends not in aer, the superlative is formed from the next case in i, by add- ing ssimus; as, By grammatical COMPARISON, we understand three adjective nouns, of which the two last are formed from the first, and im- port comparison with it, that is, heightening or lessening of its signification. Consequently those adjectives only which are capable of hav- ing their signification increased or diminished, can be compared. The POSITIVE signifies the quality of a thing simply and absolutely: as, durus, hard; parvus, little. The COMPARATIVE heightens or lessens that quality; as, du- rior, harder; minor, less. The SUPERLATIVE heightens or lessens it to a very high or very low degree; as durisimus, hardest, or most hard; mini- mus, very little or least. -The positive hath various terminations; the compartive ends always in or and us; the superlative always in mus, ma, mum. [The positive, properly speaking, is no degree of comparison, for it does not compare things together: however, it is accounted one, because the other two are founded upon, and formed from it.] The sign of the comparative in our language is the syllable er added to an adjective, or the word more put before it. The sign of the superlative is the syllable est added to an ad- jective, or the word very or most put before it. NOTE. That when the positive is a long word, or would other- wise sound harsh by having er or est added to it, we commonly make the comparative by the word more, and the superlative by most or very put before it. And for the like reason, the Latin comparative is sometimes made by magis, and the superlative by valde or maxime, put be- fore the positive. And these are particularly used, when the positive ends in us with a vowel before it; as, Pius, Godly; ar- duus, high; idoneos, fit: though not always. IRREGULAR COMPARISONS. IN 1. Bonus, melior, optimus: Good, better, best. Malus, pejor, pessimus: Evil, Magnus, major, maximus: Great, Parvus, minor, minimus: Little worse, worst. greater, greatest. less, least, 28 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. Multis, plurimus; multa, plurima; multum, plus, plurimum: much, more, most. 2. Facilis, easy; humilis, low; similis, like; make their su- perlative by changing is into limus: thus facillimus, humillimus, simillimus. 3. Exter, outward; citer, hither; supěrus, above: inferus, below; postěrus, behind; have regular comparatives; but their superlatives are, extrèmus (or extimus), uttermost; citimus, hith- erinost; supremus (or summus) uppermost, highest, last; infimus (or imus,) lowest postremus (or postumas) latest, or last. 4. Compounds in dicus, loquus, ficus, and volus, have entior and entissimus; as, maledicus, one that raileth; Magniloquis, one that boasteth; beneficus, beneficent; malevõlus, malevolent. But these seem rather to come from participles or nouns in ens. Besides, the comparatives and superlatives of adjectives derived from loquor and facio are very rare; and Terence has mirificissi- mus, and Plautus has mendaciloquius. 5. Prior, former, has primus, first; ulterior, farther, ultimus, farthest or last; propior, nearer, proximus, nearest or next; ocior, swifter, ocissimus, swiftest; their positives being out of use, or quite wanting. Proximus has also another comparative formed from it, viz. proximior. 6. There are also a great many other adjectives capable of having their signification increased, which yet want one or more of these degrees of comparison; as, albus, white, without com- parative and superlative; ingens, great, ingenitor, greater, without the superlative; sacer, holy, sacerrimus, most holy, without the comparative; anterior, former, without positive and superlative. 1 These three degrees of comparison being nothing else but three dis- tinct adjectives, may be declined either severally, each by itself, or jointly together; respect still being had to their declensions. But the first way is much easier, and will answer all the purposes of comparison as well as the other. 2 CAP. II. DE PRONOMINE. M. QUOT sunt pronomina* simplícia ? D. Octodecim; ego, tu, sui; ille, ipse, iste, hic, is, quis, qui; CHAP. II. OF PRONOUN. M. HOW many* simple'pro- nouns are there ? S. Eighteen; ego, tu, sui; ille, ipse, iste, hic, is, quis, * See Chap. XI. PART IT. CHAP II. OF PRONOUN. 29 meus, tuus, suus, noster, ves- ter; nostras, vestras, and cujas. ¶Ex his tria sunt substanti- va, ego, tu, sui; reliqua quin- decim sunt adjectiva. Nom. ĕgo, I, Sing. Gen. mel, of me, Dat. mihi, to me, Acc. me, me, Voc. Abl. me, with me: Ego, I qui: meus, tuus, suus, noster, vester; nostras, vestras, and cujas. ¶Of these three are substan- tives, ego, tu, sui; the other fifteen are adjectives. Plur. Nom. nos, we, Gen. nostrum, v. nostri, of us, Dat. nobis, to us, Acc. nos, us, Voc. Abl. nobis, with us. Tu, thou, or you. Sing. Plur. Nom. tu, thou, Gen. tui, of thee, Dat. tibi, to thee, Acc. te, thee, Voc. tu, O thou, Abl. te, with thee : Nom. vos, ye, [you] Gen. vestrum vel vestri, of you, Dat. vobis, to you, Acc. vos, you, Voc. vos, Oye [you] Abl. vobis, with you. Nom. Sui, of himself, of herself, of itself. Sing. Gen. sui, of himself, &c. Dat. sibi, to himself, Acc. se, himself, Voc. Abl. se, with himself: Nom. Plur. Gen. sui, of themselves, Dat. sibi, to themselves, Acc. se, themselves, Voc. Abl. se, with themselves. A PRONOUN is an irregular kind of noun; or it is a part of speech which has respect to, and supplies the place of a noun; as, instead of your name, I say, tu, thou or you; in- stead of Jacobus fecit, James did it, I say Ille fecit, He did it, viz. James. NOTE 1. that the Dat. mihi, is sometimes by the poets con tracted into mi. NOTE. 2. That of old, the Gen. plur. of ego was nostrorum and nostrarum; of tu, vestrorum and vestrarum, (of which there are several examples in Plautus and Terence) which were afterwards contracted into nostrûm and vestrûm.. C-2 30 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. វ NOTE 3. That we use Nostrum and Vestrum after numerals, partitives, comparatives, and superlatives; and Nostri and Vestri after other nouns and verbs; though there want not some examples of these last with Nostrum and Vestrum, even in Cicero himself, as Vossius shews. Ille, illa, illud. He, she, that, or it. Singular. Nom. ille, illa, illud Gen. illius, illius, illius, Dat. illi, illi, illi, Acc. illum, illam, illud, Voc. ille, illa, illud, Abl. illo, illa, illo: Plural. Nom. illi, illæ, illa, Gen. illorum, illarum, illorum, Dat. illis, illis, illis, Acc, illos, illas, illa, Voc. illi, illæ, illa, Abl. illis, illis, illis. Ipse, ipsa, ipsum, He himself, she herself, itself; and iste, ista, istud, he, she, that, are declined as, ille, save only that ipse, hath ipsum, in the nom. acc. and voc. sing. neut. Singular. Hic, hæc, hoc, this. Nom. hic, hæc, hoc, Plural. Nom. hi, hæ, hæc, Dat. Acc. Gen. hujus, hujus, hujus. huic, huic, huic, Gen. horum, harum, horum, Dat. his, his, his, hunc, hanc, hoc, Acc. hos, has, hæc, Abl. Voc. hic, hæc, hoc, hoc, hac, hoc: Voc. hi, hæ, hæc, Abl. his, his, his. Is, ea, id; He, she, or it. Plural. Singular. Nom. is, ea, id, Nom. ii, eæ, ea, Gen. ejus, ejus, ejus, Gen. eorum, earum, eorum, Dat. el, ei, el, Dat. iis, vel eis, Acc. eum, eum, id, Acc. eos, eas, ea, Voc. Voc. Abl. eo, ea, eo : Abl. iis vel eis. Quis, quæ, quod vel quid? Who, which, what? Singular. N. quis, quæ, quod v. quid, N. qui G. cujus, cujus, cujus, D. cui, cui, cui, Plural. quæ, quæ, G. quorum, quarum, quorum, D. queis v. quibus, H©26" A. quem, quam, quod v. quid, A. quos, quas, quæ, V. A. quo, qua, quo: V. وب A. queis v, quibus.. PART II. CHAP. II. OF PRONOun. 31 Qui, quæ, quod, Who which, that. M Plural. Singular. N. qui, G. cujus, D. cui, A. quem, quæ, quod, N. qui, quæ, quæ, cujus, cui, cujus, cui, G. quorum, quarum, quorum. D. queis, v. quibus, quam, quod, V. V. 2 quo: A. quo, qua, A. quos, quas, quæ: A. queis v. quibus. Meus, my, or mine; Tuus, thy or thine; Suus, his own, her own, its own, their own, are declined like Bonus, -a, -um; and noster, our, or ours; vester, your or yours; like Pulcher, -chra -chrum, of the first and second declension. But tuus, suus, and vester want the vocative; nos- ter, and meus have it, in which this last hath mi (and sometimes meus) in the masculine singular. Nostras, of our country; vestras, of your country; cujas, of what or which country; are declined like Felix of the third declension; gen. nostratis, dat. nostrati, &c. NOTE 1. That all nouns and pronouns which one cannot call upon, or address himself unto, want the vocative. In consequence of which rule, many nouns, as Nullus, nomo qualis, quantus, quot, &c. and several pro- nouns; as, ego, sui, quis, &c. want the vocative; but not so many, either of the one or the other, as is commonly taught. For which reason we have given vocatives to ille, ipse, hic, and idem, therein following the judgment of the great Vossius, Messieurs de Port Royal, and Johnson, which they support by the following authorities: Esto nunc, Sol, testis, and hæc mihi terra precanti. Virg. Æn. 12. Tu mihi libertas illa paterna veni. Tibul. lib. 2. El. 4. O nox illa, quæ, pene æternas huic urbi tenebras attulisti. Cic. pro. Flac. Ipse meas æther accipe summe preces. Ovid in Ibin. And the vocative of Idem seems to be confirmed by that of Ovid Met. 15. Quique fuisti Hyppolytes, dixit, nunc idem Virbius esto. Though all authors before them will only allow four pronouns, viz. Tu, meus, noster and nostras, to have the vocative. NOTE 2. That qui is sometimes used for quis; as, Cic. qui tantus fuit labor? Ter. qui erit rumor populi, si id feceris. NOTE 3. That quod, with its compounds aliquod, quodvis, quoddam, &c. are used when they agree with a substantive of the same case; quid, with its compounds, aliquid, quidvis, quiddam, &c. either have no substantive expressed, or govern one in the genitive: whence it is, that these last are commonly reckoned substantives. But that quid, as well as quod, is ori- ginally an adjective, its signification plainly shews; otherwise, we shall make multum, plus, tantum, quantum, &c, also sub- 32 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. stantives, when they govern the genitive; which yet most. grammarians agree to be adjectives, having the common word negotium understood. NOTE 4. That qui, the relative, hath sometimes qui in the ablative, and that (which is remarkable) in all genders and numbers, as Mr. Johnson evinces by a great many examples out of Plautus and Terence; to which he might have added one out of C. Nepos, III. S. NOTE 5. That nostras, vestras, and cujas, are declined like Gentile or national nouns in as in the third declension, in imi- tation of which they are formed; as, Arpinas, Fidēnas, Priver- nas, a man, woman, or thing, of or belonging to the town of Arpinum, Fidene, or Privernum, and may have the neuter as well as these; (for, as Cic. has Iter Arpinas, and Liv. Bellum Privernas; so Colum. has Arbustum nostras, and Cic. nostratia verba) contrary to what Linacer teaches. [I pass over taking notice, that in old authors, especially Plautus, we find quis and quisquis sometimes of the feminine gender; mis and tis for mei and tui; hisce for hi; hibus, ibus, for his, iis; illæ, ipsa istæ, quæ, in the genitive or dative singular feminine; em for eum; istes for istos; quoius, quoi for cujus, cui; because they are extraordinary.] OF COMPOUND PRONOUNS. I. Some are compounded of quis and qui, with some other word or syllable. In these quis is sometimes the first, and sometimes the last part of the word compounded; but qui is always the first. 1. The compounds of quis, when it is put first, are quisnam, who? quispiam, quisquam, any one; quisque, every one; quis- quis, whosoever : which are thus declined, Nominative. Gen. Dat. Quisnam, quænam, quodnam vel quidnam; cujusnam, cuinam. Quispiam, quæpiam, quodpiam vel quidpiam; cujuspiam, cuipiam. Quisquam, quæquam, quadquam vel quidquam; cujusquam, cuiquam. Quisque, quæque, quodque vel quidque ; cujusque, cuique. cujusque, Quisquis, quidquid vel quidque; cujuscujus cuicui. And so forth in their other cases, according to the simple quis.. But Quisquis has no feminine at all, and the neuter only in the- nominative and accusative. Quisquam has also quicquam for quidquam, Acc. quenquam without the feminine. The plural is scarcely used. PART II. CHAP II. OF PRONOUN. 33 2. The compounds of quis, when it is put last are aliquis, some; ecquis, who? To which some add nequis, siquis, numquis: but these are more frequently read separately, ne quis, si quis, num quis. They are thus declined, Nominative. Aliquis, aliqua, aliquod vel aliquid; Gen. alicujus, si cujus, ne cujus : Ecquis, ecqua vel ecquæ, ecquod vel ecquid; eccujus, Dat. alicui. e eccui. si cui, ne cui. Si quis, si qua, si quod vel si quid ; Ne quis, ne qua, ne quod vel ne quid; Num quis, num qua, num quod vel num quid; num cujus, num cui. NOTE. That these and only these, have qua in the nomina- tive singular feminine, and nominative and accusative plural neuter. 3. The compounds of qui are quicunque, whosoever; quidam, some; quilibet, quivis, any one whom you please; and are thus Nominative. Quicunque, quæcunque, quodcunque; Quidam, quædam, Gen. Dat. cujuscunque, cuicunque. quoddam vel quiddam; cujusdam, cuidam. Quilibet, quælibet, quodlibet vel quidlibet; cujuslibet, cuilibet. Quivis, quævis, quodvis vel quidvis; cujusvis, cuivis. Some of these are twice compounded; as, Ecquisnam, Who? unusquisque, every one. The first is scarce declined beyond its nominative, and the second wants the plural. NOTE 1. That all these compounds want the voc. except quisque, aliquis, quilibet, unusquisque, and perhaps some others. Vid. Voss. p. 335. NOTE 2. That all these compounds have seldom or never queis, but quibus, in their dative and ablative plural. NOTE 3, That Quidam hath quendam, quandam, quoddam vel quiddam, in the accusative singular; and quorundam, quarundam, quorundam, in the genitive plural; n being put instead of m for the better sound, as it is for the same reason in these cases of idem. II. Some reckon among compound pronouns ego tu, and sui, with ipse; but in the best books they are generally read separate- ly; which seems necessary, because of te ipse and se ipse, where the two words are of different cases. III. Is is compounded with the syllable dem, and contracted into idem the same; which is thus declined, Nom. Idem, · Singular.. eadem, idem, Gen. ejusdem, ejusdem, ejusdem, Dut. eidem, eidem, eidem, Acc. eundem, eandem, idem, Voc. idem, eadem, idem Abl. eodem, eadem, eodem: Plural. Nom. iidem, eædem, eadem, Gen. eorundem, earundem, eorundem Dat. eisdem vel iisdem. Acc. eosdem, easdem, Voc. iidem eædem, Abl. eisdem, vel iisdem. eadem, eadem, 34 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. IV. Most of the other compound pronouns are only to be found in certain cases and genders; as, 1. Of iste and hic is compounded, nom. isthic, isthæc, isthoc vel isthuc. Acc. Isthunc, isthanc, isthoc vel isthuc. Abl. Isthoc, isthac, isthoc. Nom. and acc. plur. neut. Isthæc. 2. Óf ecce and is, is compounded, eccum, eccam; plur. eccos, eccas; and from ecce and ille, ellum, ellam; ellos, ellas, in the accusatives. 3. Of modus and is, hic, iste, and quis, are compounded these genitives, ejusmodi, hujusmodi, istiusmodi, cujusmodi; and sometimes with the syllable ce, put in the middle, ejuscemodi, hujuscemodi, &c. 4. Of cum, and these ablatives, me, te, se, nobis, vobis, qui, or quo, and quibus, are compounded mecum, tecum, secum, nobiscum, vobiscum, quicum, or quocum, and quibuscum. 5. To these add some pronouns compounded with these sylla- bical adjections, met, te, se, pte, cine, to make their signification more pointed and emphatical, as, egomet, tute, hujusce, meapte, hiccine. REMARKS ON ENGLISH PRONOUNS. 1. In the nominative or foregoing state (as the English gram- marians call it) we use I, thou, he, she, we, ye, they, and who; but in the other cases (which they name the following state) we use me, thee, him, her, us, you, them, and whom. 2. When we speak of a person, we use who and whom, wheth- er we ask a question or not; as who did it ? the man who did it. But if we speak of a thing, with a question, we use what; as, what book is that? Without a question, we use which; as, the book which you gave me; and then it is frequently understood; as, the book you gave me. NOTE. That what is often used, even without a question, in- stead of the thing which or that which; as I know what you de- sign, i. e. The thing which, or that which, you design. As on the contrary, when it refers to some particular thing mentioned before, we make use of which even with a question; as give me the book, which book? which of the books P 3. This makes in the plural these, and that makes those. NOTE. That that is frequently used instead of who, whom, or which: as, the man that told you, the man that we saw, the book that I lent you. 4. We use my, thy, her, our, your, their, when they are joined with substantives, or the word own: and mine, thine, hers, ours, yours, theirs, when the substantive is left out or understood; as, my book, this book is mine, &c. PART II. CHAP III. OF VERB. 35 1 * NOTE. That with own, or a substantive beginning with a vow- el, we sometimes use mine and thine; as, my eye, or mine eye; thy own, or thine own. 5. We, often use here, there, where, compounded whith these particles, of, by, upon, about, in, with, instead of this, that, which, and what, with these same particles; as hereof, hereby, hereupon, hereabouts, herein, herewith; for of this, by this, upon this, about this place, in this, with this, &c. 6. Whose and its are genitives, instead of, of whom, of it; and it is a fault to use its for 'tis or it is, as some do. CAP. III. De Verbo. M. Quomodo declinatur ver- bum ? D. Per voces, modos, tem- pora, numeros et personas. M• Quot sunt voces ? 1 D. Duæ; activa et passiva. M. Quot sunt modi ? D. Quatuor; indicativus, subjunctivus, imperativus, et infinitivus. M. Quot sunt numeri ? D. Duo; singularis and plu- ralis. M. Quot sunt tempora ? D. Quinque; præsens, præter- CHAP. III. Of verb. M. HOW is a verb declined? S. By voices, moods, tenses, numbers, and persons. M. How many voices are there? S. Two; the active and pas- sive. M. How many moods are there? S. Four; indicative, sub- junctive, imperative, and infi- nitive. M. How many numbers are there ? S. Two; singular and plural. M. How many tenses are there ? S. Five; the present, the itum-imperfectum, præteritum-preter-imperfect, the preter- præteritum-plus-perfect, the preter-pluperfect, and the future. perfectum, quamperfectum and futurum. M. Quot sunt personae ? D. Tres; prima, secunda, tertia. M. How many persons are there? S. Three; first, second, third. 36 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. A VERB is a part of speech which signifies to be, to do, or to suffer.-Or, a verb is that part of speech which expresses what is affirmed or said of things. A verb may be distinguished from any other part of speech these two ways. 1. A verb being the most necessary and es- sential part of a sentence, without which it cannot subsist, what- ever word with a substantive noun makes full sense, or a sen- tence, is a verb; and that which does not make full sense with it is not a verb. 2. Whatever word, with he, or it shall, before it, makes sense, is a verb; otherwise not. I. In most verbs there are two forms or voices; the active ending in o, and the passive in or. The former expresses what is done by the nominative or person before it: the latter what is suffered by or done to the nominative or person before it; as amo, I love; amor, I am loved. II. The moods are divided into finite and infinite. The first three, viz. the indicative, subjunctive, and imperative, are called finite, because they have certain fixed terminations answering to certain persons both singular and plural. The last is called infinitive or infinite, because it is not confined to one number or person more than another. 1. The indicative mood affirms or denies positively; as, amo, I love; non amo, I do not love: or else asks a question; as, an amas? dost thou love? annon amas? dost thou not love ? 2. The subjunctive mood generally depends upon another verb in the same sentence, either going before or coming after; as, Si me ametis, præcepta mea servate, If you love me, keep my commandments. [This mood is commonly branched out into three moods, viz. the Op- tative, the Subjunctive, more strictly taken, and the Potential. 1. It is called OPTATIVE, when a word importing a wish, as, Utinam, would to God, O si, O if, goes before it. 2. It is named SUBJUNCTIVE, when it is subjoined to some other conjunction or adverb, or to interrogatives becoming indefinites. (See Chap. IX.) 3. It is called POTENTIAL, when with the simple affirmation of the verb is also signified some modi- fication or affection of it, such as a power, possibility, liberty, duty, will, &c. The signs whereof, in our language, are, may, can, might, could, would, should, and had, (for would have or should have; as, They had re- pented, for would have.) But because the terminations of these moods are the same, we have comprehended them all under one, viz. the sub- junctive, to which with small difficulty they may be reduced. Otherwise, if we will constitute as many moods as there are various modifications, wherewith a verb or affirmation can be affected, we must multiply them to a far greater number, and so we shall have a promissive, hortative, precative, concessive, mandative, interrogative mood; nay a volitive and debitive, which is commonly included in the potential. As for the optative, PART II. CHAP III. OF VERB. 37 It is plain that the wish is not in the verb itself, (which signifies only the matter of it, or what is wished,) but in the verb opto, which is under- stood, with ut, uti, or utinam, which really signifies no more but that. And it is very probable that in like manner some verb, or other word, may also be understood to what is called the potential mood, such as, ita, est, res, ita, est, fieri potest ut, &c. as Vossius, Sanctius, Perizonius, and others do contend; though Mr. Johnson is of another opinion.] 3. The Imperative mood commands, exhorts, or entreats; as, Ama, love thou. 4. The Infinitive mood expresses the signification of the verb in general, and is Englished by to; as, amare, to love. III. The Tenses are either simple or compound. The Simple Tenses are the Present, the Preter-perfect, and the Future. 1. The Present 2. The Preter-perfect Speaks of time now 3. The Future Present. Past. To come. The Compound Tenses are the Preter-imperfect, and the Pre- ter-pluperfect. 5. The Preter-imperfect refers to some past time, and imports, that the thing was present and unfinished then; as, amabam, Í did love [viz. then.] 6. The Preter-pluperfect refers to some past time, and im- ports, that the thing was past at, or before that time; as, Scripseram epistolam, I had written a letter, [i. e. before that time.] There is also a compound future tense, called the Future- perfect, or Exact, which refers to some time yet to come, and imports that a thing as yet future shall be past and finished at, or before that time; as, Cum canavero, tu leges, When I shall have supped, [i. e. after supper] you shall read. This future is only in the subjunctive mood, and the sign of it is Shall have; as the other future, called the Future-imperfect, is only in the indicative, which, when joined with another future, imports that two things yet future shall be contemporary, or exist at one time; as, Cam conabo, tu leges, When I shall sup, [i. e. in time of supper] you shall read. [And not only the tenses, but even the Moods themselves may be di- vided into Simple and Compound. I call the indicative a simple mood, because it simply affirms something of its person or nominative. But the other three moods I call compound, because they have some other ideas or modifications of our thoughts superadded to the simple signifi- cation of the verb; such as, a command, a desire, prohibition, possibility, liberty, will, duty, wish, concession, supposition, condition, purpose, &c. These modifications are either really included in the verb; as, a com- mand, &c. in the imperative, and, according to Johnson, power, will, duty, D 38 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. &c. in the mood called potential; or closely interwoven with it by the help of a conjunction, adverb, or other verb expressed or understood; and because these also generally denote time, they very frequently make all the tenses of these moods to become compound tenses. For, with respect to their execution, they are generally future; but with respect to their modal signification, they may fall under any of the other distinc- tions of time as well as the future. Thus, for instance, Lege, Read thou, with respect to its execution, is future, but with respect to the command, it is present. Again, in Legam, I may or can read, the action (if done at all) must be future, but the liberty or possibility is present; and so of others. Now, as it seems evident that from these modifications of the verb, more than from the bare execution of it, the tenses of these moods have at first been distinguished: so I am of opinion, that, had grammarians taken their measures accordingly, they had not rendered this matter so intricate as they have done. For some of them, as Sanctius, &c. determining the times of these moods by the execution only, have made the whole imperative and subjunctive of the future time, and the infinitive and participles of all times, or rather of no time: others, viz. Vossius, Linacer, Alvarus, Verepæus, &c. though they will not go so far as Sanctius, yet, upon the same grounds, make Utinam legam the future of the optative; Utinam legerem the present of it. By the same rule, they make a future of the potential in rim; as, Citius crediderim, I should, or shall sooner believe and another of the subjunctive in issem ; as, Juravit se illum statim interfecturum, nisi jusjurandum sibi dedisset, He swore he would presently kill him, if he should not swear to him. Cic. But with all imaginable deference to these great men, I humbly think that these tenses may be more easily accounted for, if we consider them as compound, i. c. respecting one time as to their execution, and another as to their various modifications, superadded to, or involved in their signification. To instance in the two last examples, (because they seem to have the greatest difficulty) Citius crediderim seems to import these two things, Ist. That I have and continue to have a reason why I should not believe it; which reason is of the imperfect or past time. And 2dly, That I shall sooner have believed it, than another thing, with respect to which it shall be past. For there are a great many examples where the preterite in rim hath the same signification with the future- perfect in ro; as, Si te inde exemerim, Terent. for exemero. See Voss. lib. v. cap. 15. and Aul. Gell. lib. xviii. cap. 2. As to the other example, the composition of two times is yet more evident; for though jusju- randum dedisset be posterior, and consequently future with respect to juravit, yet it is prior, not only to the time of the relation, but to inter- fecturum, to prevent which it behoved it necessary to be past; and so of others. The same rule, in my opinion, will likewise hold in the infinitive and participles, which, of themselves, have always one fixed time; and when they seem to be of another time, that is not in them, but in the verb that goes before them, or comes after them. Thus, for instance, scribere is always present, or co-existent with the verb before it; and scripsisse is always prior to the same verb in all its tenses; as, Dicit, dixit, or dicet; juvat, juvit, or juvabit Me scribere and Me scripsisse. So also the participles have a fixt time, present, past, or future; and when any part of the verb sum is joined with them, they retain their PART II. CHAP. III. OF VER B. 39 own times, and have these of that verb superadded to them. But be- cause there are innumerable occasions of speaking, wherein the nice distinctions of times are not necessary, therefore it frequently happens that they are promiscuously used: as I could evince by a great many examples, not only in the passive, but active voice, both in the Latin and other languages, if there were place for it. Which yet, in my judgment, does not hinder, but that every part of a verb hath formally, and of its own nature, a certain time, simple or compound, to which it is fixed and determined.] IV. There are two Numbers, the Singular and the Plural, answering to the same numbers of a noun or pronoun. V. There are three persons in each number: the First speaks of itself, the Second is spoken to, and the Third is spoken of.- The first hath only ego and nos, the second only tu and vos, and the third any substantive noun, singular and plural, put before the respective terminations of the verb, answering to them through all voices, moods, and tenses. [A verb hath the same respect to its nominative that an adjective hath to its substantive; and therefore, as an adjective hath not properly either genders or numbers, but certain terminations fitted for those of its substantive, so a verb hath properly neither persons nor numbers, but certain terminations answering to the persons and numbers of its nominative.] NOTE 1. That ego and tu are seldom expressed, because the terminations of the verb immediately discover them, without any hazard of a mistake. NOTE 2. That if a substantive noun be joined with ego or tu, the verb is of the person of these pronouns, not of the noun. NOTE 3. That in the continuation of a discourse, the third person is also frequently understood, because easily known by what went before; and these pronouns, Ille, ipse, iste, hic, is, idem, quis, and qui, do often supply the place of it. Fut. Plup. Perfect. Imp. Present THE ENGLISH SIGNS OF THE TENSES ARE, Act. the theme of the verb, and est, eth, or s; or, for the greater emphasis, do, dost, doth, or does, before it. Pas. am, art, is, are, be, beest, with a word in ed, en, t, &c. Act. ed, edst, &c. or for the greater emphasis, did, didst, be- fore it. Pas. was, wast, were, wert, with a word in ed, en, &c. Act. have, hast, hath, or has, with a word in ed, en, &c. as in the imperfect. Pas. have been, has been, hath or has been, with a word in ed, en, &c. Act. had, hadst, with a word in ed, en, &c. Pas. had been, hadst been, with a word in ed, en, &c. Act. shall, will, shalt, wilt, with the verb. Pas. shall be, will be, shalt be, wilt be, with a word in ed, en, &c. 40 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. The subjunctive mood active has frequently these signs: Present, may, or can. Imperf. might, could, would, should. Perfect, might have, could have, would have, should have. Pluperf. may have, or might have, could have, would have, should have. Future, shall have. The passive has frequently the same signs with be, or been, De conjugationibus. M. QUOT sunt conjuga- tiones ? D. Quatuor; prima, secunda, tertia, et quarta. M. Quæ sunt notæ harum conjugationum ? Prima Secunda Tertia Quarta habet D A longum E longum E breve I longum Infinitivi. ante re Of Conjugations, M. How many conjugations are there? S. Four; first, second, third, and fourth. M. What are the marks of these conjugations ? First Second Third Fourth S A long E long E shorte LI I long R the infinit. The common characteristic or mark by which these conjuga- tions are distinguished from one another, is one of these three vowels, a, e, i, before the re of the infinitive active, though they also may be known by the same vowels in several other parts of them; for A long is most frequent in the first, E long in the second, E or I short in the third, and I long in the fourth: only E before bam, bas, bat, &c. and before mus, and tis and mur, and mini, is always long, in whatever conjugation it is found. But it is to be observed, that the preterites and supines, and all the parts formed from them (because of the great irregularity of their middle syllables, and constant agreement in their last vow- el, and in their terminations arising from it, in all conjugations) cannot properly be said to be of any one conjugation more than another; for there is nothing, for example, in fricui, docui, eli- cui, amicui, or in frictum, doctum elicitum, amictum, or in the parts that come from them, whereby to distinguish their conju- gations. Prima Conjugatio. AMO. Vox Activa. Præcipuæ Partes. Præs. indic. Am-0, The first Conjugation. TO LOVE. The Active Voice. The Principal Parts. Perfect. Sup. am-avi, am-ātum, Præs. infin. am-äre. PART II. CHAP III. OF VERB. 41 INDICATIVUS MODUS. Præsens. Sing. 1 Am-o, 2 Am-as, 3 Am-at: Plu. 1 Am-amus, 2 Am-atis, 3 Am-ant, Imperfectum. Sing. 1 Am-abam, 2 Am-abas. 3 Am-abat: Plu. 1 Am-abāmus, 2 Am-abatis, 3 Am-abant. Perfectum. Sing. 1 Am-avi, 2 Am-avisti, 3 Am-avit: Plu. 1 Am-avĭmus, 2 Am-avistis, 3 Am-avērunt, v. avēre. Plusquamperfectum.. Sing. 1 Am-avĕram, 2 Am-averas, 3 Am-averat : Plu. 1 Am-averāmus, 2 Am-averatis, S Am-averánt. Futurum. Sing. 1 Am-abo, 2 Am-abis, 3 Am-abit: Plu. 1 Am-abimus, 2 Am-abītis, 3 Am-abunt. SUBJUNCTIVUS MODUS. Præsens. Sing. 1.Am-em, 2 Ames, 3 Amet: + THE INDICATIVE MOOD. The Present. 1 I love or do love, 2 Thou lovest or dost love, 3 He loveth or doth love 1 We love or do love, 2 Ye (or you) love or do love, 3 They love or do love. The Imperfect. 1 I loved or did love, 2 Thou lovedst or didst love, 3 He loved or did love: 1 We loved or did love, 2 Ye loved or did love, 3 They loved or did love. The Perfect. 1 I have loved,* 2 Thou hast loved, 3 He hath loved : 1 We have loved, 2 Ye have loved, 3 They have loved. The Plu-perfect! 1 I had loved, 2 Thou hadst loved, 3 He had loved : 1 We had loved, 2 Ye had loved, 3. They had loved. The Future. 1 I shall or will love, 2 Thou shalt or wilt love, 3 He shall or will love: 1 We shall or will love, 2 Ye shall or will love, 3 They shall or will love. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. The present. 1 I may or can love, 2 Thou mayst or or canst love, 3 He may or can love: Or, I loved or didst love, Thou lovedst or didst love, &c. as in the imperfect. D-2 42 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. Plu. 1 Am-ēmus, 2 Am-étis, 3 Am-ent. Imperfectum. Sing. 1 Am-arem, 2 Am-ares, 3 Am-aret: 2 Am-arētis, 1 We may or can love, 2 Ye may or can love, 3 They may or can love. The Imperfect. 1 I might, could, would or should love, 2 Thou mightst, couldst, wouldst &c. love, 3 He might, could, would or should love, Plu. 1 Am-eremus, 1 We might, could, would or should love, 2 Ye might, could, would or should love, 3 They might, could, would or should love. The Perfect. 3 Am-arent. Perfectum. Sing. 1 Am-avěrim, 1 I may have loved, 2 Am-averis, 2 Thou mayst have loved, 3 Am-averit: 3 He may have loved: Plu. 1 Am-averimus,1 We may have loved. 2 Am-averitis, 2 Ye may have loved, 3 Am-averint. 3 They may have loved. Plusquamperfectum. The Pluperfect. Sing. 1 Am-avissem, 1 I might, could, &c. have loved, 2 Am-avisses. 2 Thou mightst, couldst, &c. have loved, 3 Am-avisset: 3 He might could, &c. have loved : Plu. 1 Am-avissēmus1 We might, could, &c. have loved, 2 Am-avissētis, 2 Ye might, could, &c. have loved, 3 Am-avissent. 3 They might, could, &c. have loved, Futurum. The Future. Sing. 1 Am-avěro, 1 I shall have loved, 2 Am-averis, 2 Thou shalt have loved, 3 Am-averit: 3 He shall have loved: Plu. 1 Am-averimus, 1 We shall have loved, 2 Am-averitis, 2 Ye shall have loved, 3 Am-averint. 3 They shall have loved. IMPERATIVUS MODUS. Sing. 2 Am-a vel am-ato, 3 Am ato: Plu 2-Am-ate vel am-atōte, 3 Am-anto. INFINITIVUS MODus. Præs. Am-are. Perf. Am-avisse. THE IMPERATIVE MOOD. 2 Love thou or do thou love, 3 Let him love: 2 Love ye or do 3 Let them love. ye love. MOOD. THE INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. To love. Perf. To have loved. Fut. Am-atūrus esse v. fuisse. Fut.. To be about to love. PART. II. CHAP. III. OF VERB. 43 PARTICIPIA. Pros. Am-ans. GERUNDIA, Fut. Am-atūrus, -a, »um. Nom. Am-andum. Gen. Am-andi. Dat. Am-ando. Acc. Am-andum. Abl. Am-ando. SUPINA. Prius, Am-atum, Posterious, Am-atu. VOX PASSIVA, Amor, INDICATIVUS. Præsens. Sing. 1 Am-or, 2 Am-āris vel áre, 3 Am-atur: Plur. 1 Amanur, 2 Am-amini, 3 Am-antur, Imperfectum. Sing. 1 Am-abar, 2 Am-abāris vel abāre, 3 Am-abatur: Plur. 1 Am-abamur, 2 Am-abamini, 3 Am-abantur. Sing. Am-ātus, Plur, Am-ati THE PARTICIPLES. Of the Present, Loving. Of the future, About to love." THE GERUNDS. Nom. Loving. Gen. Of loving. Dat. To loving. Acc. Loving. Abl. From, in, or by loving. THE SUPINES. First, To love. Last, To love, or to be loved. THE PASSIVE VOICE. amātus, amari. THE INDICATIVE MOOD. The Present. 1 I am loved, 2 Thou art loved, 3 He is loved : 1 We are loved, 2 Ye are loved, 3 They are loved. Perfectum. 1 sum vel fui, 2 es vel fuisti, 3 est vel fuit : The Imperfect. 1 I was loved, 2 Thou wast (wert) loved, 3 He was loved: 1 We were loved, 2 Ye were loved. 3 They were loved. 1 sùmus v. fuimus, 2 estis v. fuistis, The Perfect. 1 I have been loved, 2 Thou hast been loved 3 He hath been loved 1 We have been loved, 2 Ye have been loved, 3 sunt fuerunt v. fuere 3 They have been loved. 44 RUDĪMĒNTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. Plusquamperfectum. 1 eram v. fueram, Sing. Am-atus 2 eras v. fueras,, 3 erat v. fuerat: The Pluperfect. 1 I had been loved, 2 Thou hadst been loved, 3 He had been loved : 1 eramus v. fueramus, 1 We had been loved, 2 Ye had been loved, Plur. Am-ati 2 eratis v. fueratis, 3 erant v. fuerant. Futurum. Sing. 1 Am-abor, 3 They had been loved. The Future. 1 I shall or will be loved, 2 Am-abĕris, v. -abere, 2 Thou shalt or wilt be loved, 3 Am-abitur : Plur. 1 Am-abimur, 2 Am-abimini, 3 Am-ábuntur. SUBJUNCTIVUS MODUS. Præsens. Sing. 1 Am-er, 2 Am-ēris v. ēre, 3 Am-êtur: Plur. 1 Am-emur, 2 Am-emini, 3 Am-entur. Imperfectum. Sing. 1 Am-arer, 3 He shall or will be loved: 1 We shall or will be loved, 2 Ye shall or will be loved, 3 They shall or will be loved. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. The Present. 1 I may or can be loved, 2 Thou mayst or canst be loved, 3 He may or can be loved: 1 We may or can be loved, 2 Ye may or can be loved, 3 They may or can be loved. The Imperfect. 1 I might, could, &c. be loved, 2 Am-arēris v. arēre, 2 Thou mightst, couldst, &c. be loved, 3 Am-aretur: Plur. 1 Am-aremur, 2 Am-aremini, 3 Am-arentur. 3 He might could, &c. be loved: 1 We might, could, &c. be loved, 2 Ye might, could, &c. be loved, 3 They might, could, &c. be loved. The Perfect. Perfectum. (1 sim v. fuĕrim, S. Am-atus P. Am-ati, 2 sis v. fueris, fuerit: 3 sit v. 11 may have been loved, 2 Thou mayst have been loved, 3 He may have been loved: 1 simus v. fuerimus, 1 We may have been loved, 2 sitis v. fueritis, sint v. fuerint, • 2 Ye may have been loved, 3 They may have been loved.. PART II. CHAP III. OF VÉRB. 45 Plusquamperfectum. 1 essem v. fuissem, S. Am-atus 2 esses v. fuisses, P. Am-ati 3 esset v. fuisset: The Pluperfect. 1 I might, &c. have 2 Thou mightst, &c have 3 He might, &c. have 1 essemus v. fuissemus,1 We might, &c. have 2 essetis v. fuissetis, 3 essent v. fuissent. Futurum. 1 fuĕro, Sing. Amatus 2 fueris, 3 fucrit: 1 fuerimus, Plur. Am-ati2 fueritus, 3 fuerint. IMPERATIVUS MODUS. Præsens. Sing. 2 Am-äre v. ātor, 3 Am-ator: Plur. 2 Am-amini, 3 Am-antor. INFINITIVUS MODUS. Præs. Am-āri, 2 Ye might, &c. have 3 They might, &c. have The Future. 1 I shall have been loved, 2 Thou shalt have been loved, 3 He shall have been loved : 1 We shall have been loved, 2 Ye shall have been loved, 3 They shall have been loved. THE IMPERATIVE MOOD. The Present. 2 Be thou loved, 3 Let him be loved : 2 Be ye loved, 3 Let them be loved. THE INFINITIVE MOOD. To be loved, Perf. Am-atus esse v. fuisse, To have or had been loved, Fut. Am-atum iri, PARTICIPIA. To be about to be loved. THE PARTICIPLES. been loved. Perfecti temporis, Am-atus, -a, -um, Of the Perfect, Loved. Am-andus, -a, -um, of the Fut. To be loved, Futuri, SECUNDA CONJUGATIO. VOX ACTIVA. Doceo, docui, doctum, docere, INDICATIVUS. Singular. Plurd 1 2 3 1 2 -es, Pr. Doc-eo, Im, Doc-ebam, ebas, ebat: ebamus, -et: -ēmus, -ētis, -ent. -ebatis, -ebant. 46 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. Per. Doc-ui, -uisti, uit: -uĭmus, -uistis, } -uerunt. Pl. Doc-uĕram, -ueras, -uerat: -ueramus, Fut. Doc-ebo, -ebis, -ebit: -ebimus, SUBJUNCTIVUS. -eat : -eret: Pr. Doc-eam, -eas, Im. Doc-érem, -eres, Per. Doc-uĕrim, -eris, uerit: Pl. Doc-uissem, -uisses, -uisset: Fut. Doc-uĕro, -ueris, uerit: Præs. Doc- {to, INFINITIVUs. Præs. Doc-ére. Per. Doc-uisse. Fut. Doc-tūrus esse v. fuisse. v. uĕre. -uerant: ueratis, -ebitis, -bunt. 1 -eamus, -eatis, -eant. -erēmus, -eretis, -erent. -uerimus, -ueritis, -uerint. -uissemus, -uissetis, --uissent. -uerimus, -ueritis, -uerint. IMPERATIVUS. -eto. S-ēte, 2-etōte, -ento. SUPINA. PARTICIPIA. 1. Doctum. Pr. Doc-ens. 2. Doctu. GERUNDIA. Doc-endum. Fu. Doc-tūrus. Doc-endi. Doc-endo. Doceor, VOX PASSIVA. doctus, í docĕri. INDICATIVUS,' Singular. Plural. Pr. Doc-eor, Fut. Doc-ebor, Pr. Doc-ear, Im. Doc-erer, -eāris, -eāre, -erēris, Im. Doc-ebar, S-ēris, -etur: -emur, -emini, -entur -ēre, -ebāris, ebatur : -ebamur, -ebamini, -ebantur, -ebare, -ebĕris, „ebitur : ebimur, -ebimini, -ebuntur. -ebere, SUBJUNCTIVUS. -eatur: eamur, -eamini, -eantur. -eretur: -eremur, -eremini, -erentur. -erēre, . IMPERATIVUS. Præs. Doc- S-ēre, -etor: -emini, -entor: etor, INFINITIVUS, Præs. Doc-ēri, Perf. Doc-tus esse vel fuisse, Fut. Doc-tum iri. ✩ PARTICIPIA. Per. Doc-tus, -a, -um. Fut, Doc-endys. -um. PART II. CHAP III. OF VERB. 47 TERTIA CONJUGATIO. VOX ACTIVA. Lego, lēgi, lectum, legere. INDICATIVUS. Singular. 1 Plural. 2 3 1 2 3 -is, -it: -ĭmus, -itis, -unt. Præs. Leg-go, Imp. Leg-ebam, -ebas, -ebat: -ebamus, -ebatis, -ebant. Perf. Leg-i, -isti, -it: -ĭmus, -istis, -ērunt v. -ēre. Plus. Leg-ĕram, -eras, -erat: -eramus, -eratis, -erant. -et: -ēmus, -ētis, -ent. Fut. Leg-am, -es, SUBJUNCTIVUS. -at : -amus, -atis, -ant. -ĕrēmus, -erimus, -eretis, -erent. -issemus, -eritis, -erint. -issetis, -issent. 1 ་ Præs. Leg-am, as, Imp. Leg-ěrem, -eres, -eret: Perf. Leg-ĕrim, -eris, erit: Plus. Leg-issem, -isses, -isset: Fut. Leg-ĕro, eris, erit: -erimus, eritis, -erint. Præs. Leg- {to, INFINITIVUS. IMPERATIVUS. Præs. Leg-ĕre. 1. Lectum. Perf. Leg-isse. 2. Lec-tu. PARTICIPIA. S-ite, žto : -unto. -itote, SUPINA. GERUNDIA. Pr. Leg-ens. Leg-endum. Fut. Lec-turus. Fut. Lec-turus Leg-endi. Leg-endo. esse vel fuisse. VOX PASSIVA. + Lĕgor, lectus, INDICATIVUS. legi. Singular. + Præs. Leg-or S-ĕris, Imp. Leg-êbar, -ĕre, Plural. -itur: -imur, mini, untur. -ebaris, ebatur: -ebamur,'-ebamini, -ebantur. -ebare, -ēris, etur: -ēre, Fut. Leg-ar, Præs. Leg-ar 2-åre, emur, emini, -entur, -amur, -amini, -antur. SUBJUNCTIVUS. S-āris, -atur. Ş-ereris, -eretur: ĕremur, -eṛemini, -erentur. Imp. Leg-èrer, 2.erere, 48 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. IMPERATIVUS. Præs. Leg- S-ĕre, -itor, -itor: -imini, -untor, PARTICIPIA. INFINITIVUS. Præs. Leg-i. Perf. Lec-tus, -a, -um. -a, -um, Perf. Lec-tus esse v. fuisse. Fut. Leg-endus, Fut. Lec-tum iri. QUARTA CONJUGATIO. VOX ACTIVA. Audio, audīvi, audītum, audire. INDICATIVUS. Singular. f 2 3 1 Pr. Audio, -is, -it: -īmus, Plural. 2 3 -ītis, -iunt. Im. Aud-iēbam, -iebas, -iebat: Pe. Aud-īvi, -ivisti, -ivit: -iebamus, -iebatis, -iebant. -ivimus, -ivistis, {ivere. -ivērunt. Pl. Aud-ivĕram, -iveras, -iverat: -iveramus, -iveratis, -iverant. -ies, -iet: iemus, -iētis, -ient. Fu. Aud-iam. Pr. Aud-iam, SUBJUNCTIVUS. -iant. -ias, -iat: iamus, -jātis, Im. Aud-irem, -ires, -iret: -irēmus, -irētis, irent. Pe. Aud-ivěrim, -iveris, -iverit: -iverimus, iveritis, -iverint. Pl. Aud-ivissem, ivisses, -ivisset: -ivissemus, -ivissetis, -ivissent. Fu. Aud-ivēro, iveris, -iverit: iverimus, -iveritis, iverint. IMPERATIVÚS. Pr. Aud. S -i, Site, îto: iunto. ito, itote, INFINITIVUS. SUPINA. PARTICIPIA, GERUNDIA. Pr. Aud-ire. 1 Aud-ītum. | Pr. Aud-iens. Pe. Aud-ivisse, | 2 Aud-ītu. Fn. Aud-iturus esse v. fuisse. Aud-iendum. Fu. Aud-iturus. Aud-iendi. Aud-iendo, PART II. CHAP III. OF VERE. 49 Audior, VOX PASSIVA. audītus, INDICATIVUS. audīri. Singular. Plural. Pr. Aud-ior, S-iris, -itur: -imur, -imini, -iuntur. -Ire, Im. Aud-iebar, (-iebāris, -iebatur: -iebamur, -iebamini, -iebantur. Fu. Aud-iar, Pr. Aud-iar, -iebāre, S-ieris, -ietur: -iemur, -iemini, -ientur. {-ière, SUBJUNCTIVUS. -iaris, jatur: -iamur, -iare, -iamini, -iantur. Im. Aud-irer, -irēris, iretur: -iremur, -iremini, -irentur. -irere, IMPERATIVUS. S-ire, Præs. Aud- -itor, INFINITIvus. PARTICIPIA. Præs. Aud-iri. -itor: -imini, iuntor. Perf. Aud-itus esse v. fuisse. Fut. Aud-itum iri. Perf. Aud-itus, -a, -um. Fut. Aud-iendus, -a, -um. NOTE. That in the examples of the second, third, and fourth, Conju gations, we have omitted such parts of the passive voice as are supplied by the participle perfect with the verb sum, viz. the perfect, and pluper- fect, of the indicative, and the perfect, pluperfect, and future, of the subjunctive, as being the same in all conjugations with the example of the first, the change of the participle only excepted: But it is carefully to be observed, that the participle being an adjective, must agree in gen der, number and case with its substantive, or (which is the same thing] with the person before it. 1. REMARKS shewing when a LATIN VERB is to be ren- dered otherwise in ENGLISH than in the foregoing examples. 1. WHEN the continuation of a thing is signified, the En- glish verb may be varied in all its tenses by the participle in ing with the verb am; as, Pres. I am reading, Imp. I was reading, Perf, I have been reading, Plup. I had been reading, Fut. I shall be reading, fI read. for I did read. I have read. I had read. I shall read. E 50 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. 1 So like in the passive voice, the house is building, domus ædificatur; the lesson was prescribing, lectio præscribebatur. Sometimes a is set before the participle: as While the house is a building, It is a doing, He is a dying. 2. When a question is asked, the nominative case or person is set after the verb, or the sign of the verb; as, Love I? Do i love? Can I love? Should he be loved? 3. We have made thou the second person singular, to_distin- guish it from the plural: But it is customary with us, [as also with the French and others], though we speak but to one par- ticular person, to use the plural you, and never thou, but when we address ourselves to Almighty God, or otherwise when we signify familiarity, disdain, or contempt. 4. The perfect of the indicative is often Englished as the im- perfect; as, Nunquam amavi hune hominem, I never loved [or did love] this man.-See a train of examples in Ovid. Meta- morph. lib. 1. from v. 21, to 39. 5. The perfect tense is frequently Englished by had after An- tequam, postquam, ubi or ut for postquam: as, postquam cupera- vimus isthmum, after we had [were] passed over the isthmus. Ovid. Hæc ubi dicta dedit, When he had spoken these words. Liv. Ut me salutavit, statim Roman profectus est, After he had saluted me, &c. Cic. 6. We have chosen may, can, might, could, &c. for the English of the subjunctive mood, because these are the most frequent signs of it, and distinguish it best from other moods; but very often it is the same with the indicative, save only that it hath some conjunction or indefinite word before it; such as, If, seeing, lest, that, although, I wish, &c. as, Si amem, If I love : Ne a- mem, Lest I love; Causa est cur amem, It is the cause why I love. Ovid. And frequently it hath both; as, oro ut ames, I entreat that you may love. Idem. 7. The present of the subjunctive after Quasi, Tanquam, and the like, is sometimes Englished as the imperfect; as, Quasi intelligent qualis sit, as if they understood what kind of person he is. Cic. 8. When a question is asked, the present of the subjunctive is frequently Englished by shall or should; as, Eloquar an sileam? Shall I speak or be silent? Virg. Singula quid re feram? Why should I mention every thing? Ovid. Likewise after Non est quod? Non est (supple causa) quod eas, There is no reason why you should go, or you need not go. Sometimes it is Eng- lished by would; as, In facimus jurásse putes, You would think they had sworn to [commit] wickedness. Ovid. PART II. CHAP. III. OF VERB. 51 } 9. We have Englished the perfect of the subjunctive in rim by may have; (as, Ne frustra ne tales viri venerint, That such men as these may not have come in vain. Cic. Forsitan audiêris, You may perhaps have heard of it; to distinguish it from the present and pluperfect, by the signs of which it is also most fre- quently Englished; as, Ut sic dixerim, That I may so speak. Uhi P.go audiverim? Where should I have heard it, Unus homo tantas strages dediderit? Could one man make so great a slaugh- ter? Virg. Fortasse errărim, Perhaps I might be in an error. Plin. Oratores quos viderim peritissimi, The ablest orators I have seen [or could see] Quintil. 10. This perfect in rim sometimes inclines very much to a fu- ture signification, and then it is Englished by should, would, could, can, will, shall; as, Citius crediderim, I should sooner believe. Juv. Libenter audiêrim, I would gladly hear. Cic. Ci- ceronem cuicunque eorum facile opposuerim, I could easily match Cicero with any of them. Quintil. Non facile dixerim, I can- not well tell. Cic. Nec tamen excluserim alios, And yet I will not exclude others. Plin. Si paululum modo quid te fugerit, ego periêrim, If you but trip in the least I shall be undone. Ter. But all those ways of speaking, though indeed they respect the future as to the execution, yet they seem also to look a little be- yond it to a time when their futurity shall be past; and so come near in signification to the Future in Ro. 11. The perfect of the subjunctive after Quasi tanquam, and the like may sometimes be Englished by had: as, Quasi affuerim, As if I had been present. Plaut. Perinde ac si jam vicerint, As if they had already overcome. Cic. 12. The pluperfect in Issem is sometimes Englished by should; as, imperaret quod vellet, quodcunque imperavisset, se esse facturos, He might command what he pleased, whatever he com- manded [should command] they would do. Cic. Foedus ic- tum est his legibus, ut cujus populi cives eo certamine vicissent is alteri imperaret, An Agreement was made on these terms, that that people, whose countrymen should be victorious in that com- bat, should have the sovereignty over the other. Liv. And this happens when a thing is signified as future at a certain past time referred to; and commonly takes place, when what was former- ly said directly is afterwards recited indirectly; as, Ne dubita, da- bitur quodcunque optaris, Doubt not, whatsoever thou shalt choose shall be given thee. Ovid. Sol Phaethonti facturum se esse dixit, quicquid optasset, The Sun told Phaton that he would do whatsoever he should choose. Cic. Where it is worth noticing 52 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. that, what was the Future of the Subjunctive in the direct speech, becomes the pluperfect in the indirect recital of it. See Turner's Exercises, p. 21, &c. But as we have said, p. 30, the plu-perfect, notwithstanding its coming in the place of a Future, still retains its own proper compound time, that is, it was prior to a thing now past at the time of the recital by Cicero, though it was fu- ture when first spoken by the Sun. And therefore there is no reason for making this termination issem a future tense, as Mr. Turner does. 13. Though the proper English of the Future in ro be shall have, yet generally the have or the shall, and frequently both, are omitted; as, Qui Antonium oppresserit, is bellum confecerit, He who shall cut off Antony, shall put an end to the war. Cic. Haud desinam donec perfecero hoc, I will not give over till I have effected this. Ter. Si negaverit, If he denies it. Cic. Sometimes it is Englished by will; as, Dixerit fortasse aliquis, Somebody will perhaps say. Cic. Aut consolando, aut consilio, aut re juvero, I will assist you either by comforting you, or with council, or with money. Idem. But though we thus render the future in ro in our language, and though (which is more material) very frequently it and the future of the indicative are used promiscuously, yet I cannot be persuaded that in any instance the formal significations of these are the same, as Mr. Johnson contends, p. 339. But still think with the great Vos- sius, that the future in ro is always a future perfect, that is, that there is a time insinuated when a thing yet future shall be finished or past; and that even when a future of the indicative is joined with it, which in order of time should be done before it; as, Pergratum mihi feceris, si disputabis, You shall have done [shall do] me a great favour, if you shall dispute. Cic. For what hinders that we may not faintly hint at the finishing of an action yet future, without formally considering the finish- ing of another action on which it depends; and on the contrary? But if the promiscuous usage of tenses, one for another, be sufficient to make them formally the same, then we shall con- found all tenses, and overthrow the very arguments Mr. Johnson makes use of against Sanctius, with respect to the tenses of the infinitive. 14. The to of the infinitive is generally omitted after may, can, might, would, could, (which are sometimes verbs them- selves, and not the bare signs of them :) also after must, bid, dare, let, help, and make. PART. II. CHAP. III. OF VERB. 53 15. But what is most to be regarded in the infinitive is, that when it hath an accusative before it, it is commonly Englished as the indicative mood, the participle that being sometimes put before it, but oftener understood. And it is carefully to be remarked, that the same tenses of the infinitive are differently Englished, according as the verb varies its tenses; as will ap- pear in the following scheme. Dicit me scribere, Dixit me scribere, Dicet me scribere, Dicit me scripsisse, Dixit me scripsisse, Dicet me scripsisse, Dicit me scripturum [esse] Dixit me scripturum [esse] Dicet me scripturum [esse] He says [that] I write. He said [that] I was writing: He shall say [that] I am writing. He says [that] I wrote, or did write. He said [that] I had written. [write. He shall say [that] I have written, or did He says [that] I will write. He said [that] I would write. He shall say [that] I will write. Dicit me scripturum [fuisse] He says [that] I would have written. Dixit me scripturum [fuisse] He said [that] I would have written. Dicet me scripturum [fuisse] He shall say [that] I would have written. It will be of great use to accustom the learner to render the infinitive after this manner, both in English and Latin, especially after he has been taught something of construction; and then to cause him to vary the accusative me, into te, se, illum, hominem, feminam, &c. and these again into the Plural, nos, vos, se, illos, homines, fœminas, &c. But he must be careful to make the participles agree with them in gender, number, and case. NOTE 1. That when the preceding verb is of the present or future tense, the future of the infinitive with esse, is rendered by shall or will; and when it is of the perfect tense, the future of the infinitive is rendered by would, as in the examples above; and sometimes by should; as, Dixit te sciturum esse, I said that you should know. NOTE 2. That when the preceding verb is of the imperfect or pluperfect tenses, the English of the infinitive is the same as when it is of the perfect. 16. The perfect of the indicative and subjunctive passive, made up with sum or sim, are Englished by am, art, is, are, instead of have been, when the thing is signified to be just now past; as, vulneratus sum, I am wounded; Opus finitum est, The work is finished; Cum tempora mutata sint, Since the times are changed. 17. When it is made up by fui, it is frequently Englished by was, wast, were, wert,; as, Roma fuit capta, Rome was taken :: £.2 54 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. as is also what is called the pluperfect, with eram and essem ; as, Labor finitus erat, The labour was finished; Si labor finitus esset, If the labour were finished. II. REMARKS ON THE LATIN CONJUGATIONS. 1. A GREAT part of the passive voice, and some of the ac- tive is made up of two of its own participles, and the auxiliary verb sum (of which you have the full conjugation, p. 62.) after this manner: Sum or fui eram or fueram essem or fuissem fuero The Participle J sim or fueram Perfect with The Participle Fut. With { esse or fuisse esse or fuisse makes the Perf Indicat. Plup. Perf. Plup. Passive. Subjunct. Fut. Perf. Infinit. Fut. Infinit. Active. 2. Having, p. 40, laid it down as a probable opinion, that every part of a verb, with all its participles, have a certain fixed time simple or compound, which they formally and of their own na- ture signify, it will perhaps be here expected that I should account for that great variety that is found in the passive voice. To put this matter in the clearest light I am able, I must pre- mise another division of the tenses, viz. into passing and past; or into such as import the continuance of an action or thing, without regard to the ending or finishing of it; and such as im- port that the thing is finished (or to be finished) and done. Of the first sort are the present, imperfect, and future-imperfect; of the second sort are the perfect, plu-perfect, and future-perfeat. See page 29. From this division of the tenses, together with what we have formerly said, we are furnished with an easy me- thod of distinguishing all the parts of the passive. Thus, for instance, let the subject of discourse be the building of a house. 1. When I say Domus ædificatur, I mean that it is just now a building, but not finished. 2. When Edificabatur, that it was then, or at a certain past time, a building, but not then finished. 3. Edificabitur, that some time hence it shall be a building, with- out any formal regard to the finishing of it. But when I make use of the participle perfect, I always signify a thing completed and ended; but with these subdistinctions. 1. Edificata est; I mean simply, that it is finished, without any regard to the time when. 2. Edificata fuit; it is finished, and some time since. PART II. CHAP III. OF VERB. 55 has intervened. 3. Edificata erat; it was finished at a certain past time referred to, with which it was contemporary. 4. di ficata fuerat; it was finished before a certain past time referred to, to which it was prior. 5. Edificata erit; it shall be finished sometime hereafter, either without regard to a particular time when, or with respect to a certain time yet future, with which its finishing shall be contemporary. 6. And lastly, Edificata fuerit; it shall be finished and past before another thing yet future, to which its finishing shall be prior. And thus we have nine different times or complications of times, without con- founding them with one another. But then, how comes it to pass that these are so frequently used promiscuously? I answer, that this proceeds from one or more of these four reasons.-1. Be- cause it very frequently happens in discourse that we have no occasion particularly to consider these various relations and complications of times; and it is the same thing to our purpose whether the thing is or was done, or a doing; or whether it was done just now, or some time ago; or whether another thing was (or shall be) contemporary with, or prior to it: and the matter being thus, we reckon ourselves at liberty to take several parts of the verb at random, as being secured not only of being under- stood, but also that, in these circumstances, whatever we pitch on, even when examined by the rules above, shall be found liter- ally true. 2. It is usual with us to state ourselves as present with, and as it were, eye witnesses of the things we relate, though really they were transacted long before; whence it is that we frequently use the present instead of some past time. 3. It is to be remarked, that there are some verbs, the action whereof is in some sense finished when begun; in which case it will some- times be all one whether we use the passing or past tenses. And 4. The present tense (which strictly speaking is gone before we pronounce it) is generally taken in a larger acceptation, and Sometimes used for the future, when we signify that the execu- tion is very near, or (according to Perizonius) when, together with the action, we take in also the preparation to it. The bre- vity we are confined to, will not allow us to illustrate these things with examples. But by them I think we may account for the promiscuous usage of the tenses, in both voices; and what cannot be reduced to these, seems to be an abuse of the lan-· guage, and being very rarely to be met with, and perhaps only among the poets, ought not to be made a common standard. I shall only add for a proof that these tenses are not always to be used indifferently, that when we signify a thing to be just now. 56 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. finished, we cannot use fui or fuerim, or fuisse, but sum, sin, and esse. 3. Whether the learner should be obliged to get by heart those parts of the passive that are supplied by sum, or if they should be referred to construction (to which they seem more naturally to belong) I leave to the discretion of the master. 4. Besides those parts which are thus made up, all the other parts may be resolved into its own participles and the verb sum, though their significations are not precisely the same; as, Amo, amabam, amavi, amaveram, amabo. Sum amans eram amans, fui amans, fuerum umans, ero umans, or amabar, amabor, amer Amor, Sum amatus, eram amatus, ero amatus, amatus sim, 8um amaturus. amarer. amatus essem. 5. The participle in rus with the verb sum is frequently used instead of the future of the indicative, especially if purpose or intention is signified; as, Profecturus sum, or Proficiscar, I will go, or I am to go; and with sim add essem instead of the future-imperfect, or plu-perfect of the subjunctive; as, Non dubito quin sit facturus, I doubt not but he will do it. Non dubitavi quin esset facturus, I doubted not but he would do it ;. and not quin fecerit, or faceret, or fecisset. 6. We have not joined ero with fuero for the future of the subjunctive, because we thought it incongruous to couple words of different moods: though it must be owned that it comes nearer in signification to the future of the subjunctive, than that of the indicative; as, Ovid. Qui cum victus erit, is much the same as Victus fuerit: and so these ancient lawyers, Scævola, Brutus, and Manilius, understand the words of the Atinian law, Quod subreptum erit, ejus rei æterna auctoritas esto. But that a pre- terite time is there insinuated, is owing, not to the word erit, but to the preterite participle with which it is joined, as they learnedly argue. See Aulus Gellius, lib. xvii. cap. 7. 7. We have omitted the termination minor in the second per- son plural of the imperative, not thinking it fit to make that an ordinary standard (as the common Rudiments do) which is to be found only once or twice in Plautus, Epid. 5. 2. Facto opere arbatraminor. And Pseud. 2. 2. Pariter progrediminor. I 8. For the same reason we have excluded the ancient termi- nation asso, in the future-subjunctive of the first conjugation; as, Excantasso, in the laws of the twelve tables, Levasso in Ennius, Abjurasso, Invitasso, Canasso, Irritasso, Servasso, &c. in Plautus; for Excantavero, Levavero, &c. to which may be PART II. CHAP III. OF VERB. 57 added esso of the second conjugation; as, Licessit, Idem; pro- hibessit, Cic. for Licuerit, prohibuerit. To these some add Jusso for jussero, in that of Virg. Æn. 11. v. 467. Cætera, quo jusso, mecum manus inferat arma. But though I was once of that opinion, yet now I incline with Vossius to think that it is only a syncope: but not for the reason brought for it by him, namely, that the other examples in sso change r into ss, as, Levaro, levasso; but because I believe these old futures were formed not from the common futures in ero, as he supposes, but from the second person sing. of the present of the indic. by adding so; as, levas, levasso; prohibes, prohibesso: According to which rule Jubeo must have formed jubesso, not jusso. 9. Upon the same account we have omitted the future of the infinitive in assere formed from asso; as, Impetrassere, recon- ciliassere, expugnassere, in Plautus; for impetraturum esse, &c. 10. Though we frequently meet with amaturus and amatus esse vel fuisse, &c. in the nominative, as, Dicitur amaturus esse, yet we have contented ourselves with the accusative amaturum and amatum, as most common, reserving the distinction between these to construction.* [See page 85.] 11. The future of the infinitive passive is made up of the first supine and iri the infinitive passive of eo: And therefore it is not varied in numbers and genders, as the parts made up of the participle with sum. 12. But the supine with ire is not the future of the infinitive. active, as some teach; for such phrases as these, Amatum ire, Doctum ire, are rather of the present than future tense. 13. The participle in dus with esse and fuisse, is not properly the future of the infinitive passive, as is commonly believed: For it does not so much import futurity, as necessity, duty, or merit. For there is a great difference between these two sen- tences, Dicit literas à se scriptum iri, and Dicit literas à se scri- bendas esse; the first signifiyng, That a letter will be written by him, or, That he will write a letter; and the second, That a letter must be written by him, or, He is obliged to write a letter. For though Sanctius, and Messieurs de Port Royal con- tend that this participle is sometimes used for simple futurity, yet I think Perizonius and Johnson have clearly evinced the contrary. * The nominative has been adopted in this edition. 58 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. 14. It is to be noted, That the imperative mood wants the first person both singular and plural, because no man can or needs command or exhort himself: Or, if he does, he must jostle him- self out of the first into the second person, as in that of Catullus, speaking to himself, At, tu, Catulle, destinatus obdura. But do you, Catullus, continue obstinate. 15. The present of the subjunctive is most frequently used in- stead of the imperative, especially in forbidding, after Ne, nemo, nulus, &c. as, Valeas, Farewell, for Vale. Ne facias, Do it not, rather than Ne fac. And sometimes the future of the subjunc- tive; as, Tu videris, see you to it. Ne dixeris, Don't say that. And sometimes also the future of the indicative; as, Non occi- des, Thou shalt not kill, for Ne occide, or occidito. Sed valebis meaque negotia videbis. Cic. i. e. Sed vale meaque negotia vide. Referes ergo hæc & nuncius ibis Pelidae genitori, Virg. i. e. refer & ito. But it is to be remarked that none of these are proper imperatives; for to the first is understood, oro, rogo, peto, or the like with ut; as also to the second, with ut understood, or ne expressed; and the third is only a command by consequence, because of the authority, influence or power of the speaker. For which reason, and to keep the moods from interfering with one another, we have excluded these from the imperative: Though the common rudiments take in the first, and Alvarus the second and third. However, it is observable that we shew most civility and respect when we use the subjunctive, and most authority by the future of the indicative, and nto of the impera- tive; which last is the ordinary strain in which laws are deliv- ered. But this rule is not always followed. 16. The ris of the second person passive is more usual than re; and erunt of the perfect of the indicative active than ere; especially in prose, in which, if a vowel follow, they are very rarely to be met with. III. REMARKS UPON ENGLISH VERBS. 1. AN English verb hath only two tenses, distinguished by different terminations, and both in the active voice, viz. the present and preterite. The present is the verb itself, and the preterite is commonly made by adding ed to it, or d, when it ends in e; as, Fill, filled; Love, loved. 2. All the other parts of the active, and the whole passive is made up of the auxiliary verbs, do, have, shall, will, may, can, PART II. CHAP III. OF VERE. 59 and am, as in page 41, and in the example, To love, page 42, &c. 3. An English verb hath different terminations for the persons of the singular number. The present hath three or four. The first person is the verb itself; the second ends in est or st; the third in eth, es, or s. The preterite bath only two; the first commonly ending in ed, and the second in est or st: But the third person singular of the preterite, and all the persons plural, both of it and the present, cannot otherwise be distinguished than by the nominatives before them; which therefore can never be omitted as in the Latin. 4. We have two participles, the present ending always in ing, and the preterite ending regularly in ed, but very frequently in en and t. 5. There are a great many irregular English verbs; but it is to be noted, 1. That that irregularity relates only to the termina- tion of the preterite tense, and the passive participle. 2. That it reaches only such words as are native and originally English. 3. That it is to be found only in words of one syllable, or derived from words of one syllable. 4. That where the preterite is regular, the passive participle is the same with it. Except hewed, mowed, shewed, snowed, sowed; which have hewn, mown, shown, snown, sown. 7 6. These irregularities may be reduced to the following heads : (1.) The d is changed into t after c, ch, sh, f, k, p, x; and after's and th when pronounced hard; and sometimes after 1, m, n, r, when a short vowel goes before it, as, plac't, snatch'd, fish't, walk't, dwelt, smelt. But when a long vowel goes before p, it is either shortened, or changed into a short one; as, kept, slept, wept, crept, swept, leapt, from keep, sleep, weep, creep, sweep, leap; as also sometimes before l, m, n, r, and v turned into f; as feel, felt ; dream, dreamt ; mean, meant; leave, left, (2.) When the present ends in d or t, the preterite is some- times the same with it; as, read, cast, hurt, burst, hit, quit and when two vowels precede, the last is left out; as, spread, spred; lead, led; feed, fed; bleed, bled; meet, met. When a consonant comes before d, it is sometimes changed into t; as, bend, bent; lend, lent; send, sent; rend, rent; gird, girt. (3.) Most of the other irregular verbs may be comprehended under the following lists. 60 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. I. Such as have their preterite and participle passive the same. Bind, bound. Grind, ground. Abide, abode. Flee, Awake, awoke. [Find, found. fled. Pay, paid, Sting, stung. Say, said. Swing, swung. Beseech, besought. Fling, Alung. Seek, sought. Swim, swum. Sell, sold. Teach, taught. Sit, sat, Tell, told, Buy, Catch, hung. Shine, shone. Think, thought. heard. Spin, spun. Work, wrought. Win, won. Bring, brought. Gild, gilt. Dig, Drink, Fight. bought. Hang, caught. Hear, dug. Lay, laid. drunk. faught. Make, made. Lose, lost. II. Such as have the preterite Bear, bore, born. Freeze, Begin, began, begun. Get, bade, bidden, Give, beat, beaten. Go,. Spring, sprung. Stand, stood. Stick, stuck. Wind, wound. Wring, wrung. and participle different : as, froze, frozen.Shrink, shrank, shrunk, gotten, Sink, sank, sunk. given. Slay, got, gave, slew, slain. slidden. went, gone, Slide, slid, grew, grown. Smite, smote, smitten. hewed, hewn. Strike, struck, stricken. hidden. Speak, spoke, spoken. spat, spitten. Bid, Beat, Bite, bit, bitten. Grow, Blow, blew, blown. Hew, Chide, chid, chidden. Hide, hid, Choose, chose, chosen. Hold, Cleave, clove, cleft, Know, Come, came, come. Ly, lay, held, holden, Spit, knew, Dare, Crow, crew, crowed. durst, dared. Ride, rode, Ring, rang, rung, Take, took, Do, did, done. Rise, rose, risen, Tear, tore, Draw, drew, drawn. Run, ran, run, See, saw, seen. Seethe sod, known. Strive, strove. striven. lain. Swear, swore, sworn. ridden. Swell, swelled, swoln. taken. torn. Drive, drove, driven. • Eat, ate, eaten. Fall, fell, fallen. Shake, shook, Fly, flew, flown. Shear, shore, Forsakeforsook forsaken. Shoot, shot, + Thrive, throve, thriven. Throw, threw, thrown. sodden, Tread, trode, trodden, shaken. Were, wore, worn. shorn. Weave, wove, woven, shotten. Write, wrote, written, These preterites, Bare, share, sware, tare, ware, clave, gat, begat, forgat, brake, spake, slang, sprang, swang, wan, stank, sank, are seldom used. But, Beseech'd, catch'd, work'd, digg'd, gilded, girded, hang'd, swam, writ, for besought, caught, &c. are frequently to be met with. NOTE I. That when the verb ends in one consonant, that consonant is for the most part doubled before ing, ed, est, edst, and eth, as Worship, worship- ping, worshipped, worshipest, worshipedst, worshipeth; As also before en; as, Bid, bidden. NOTE 2. That the apostrophus, (which was become too common in English verbs: as, Lov'd, lov'st, for loved, lavest,) begins now to be dis- used by the most polite writers in prose; but poets still use it, though, not so much as formerly. NOTE 3. That the Preterite Active and the Participle Passive (when one word serves for both) are thus distinguished: When it hath nothing before it but the nominative alone, or have or had with it, it is the Pre- terite active; but when it hath any part of the helping verb am, it is the Participle Passive. PART II. CHAP III. OF VERB. 61 Except Come, gone, run, set, risen, fallen, grown, withered, and such like intransitive verbs, which have frequently the Passive Signs am, art, &c. instead, of have in the Perfect tense; and was, wast, &c. instead of had, in the Plu-perfect: as, Veni, I am come; Veneram, I was come. : NOTE 4. That though the Latin perfect frequently answers both to have and did (or the preterite termination ed, &c.) yet they seem to be thus, distinguished did or ed, &c. respects a certain past time, in which the thing was finished, or a finishing; as, I wrote, or did write yesterday'; have either speaks of a thing as but just now past, or at least does not refer to any particular time that it happened at; as, I have written my letter, i. e. just now: I have read of Julius Cæsar, i. e. some time or, other. The first of these is called the preterperfect definite, and the other the preterperfect indefinite. NOTE 5. That shall and will, by Mr. Brightland, are thus distinguished. In the first person simply shall foretells; In will a threat, or else a promise dwells. Shall in the second and the third does threat; Will simply then foretells the future feat. By Mr. Turner thùs, Will imports the will or purpose of the person it is joined with; shall implies the will of another, who promises or threatens to do the thing, or cause it to be done, permits it, or commands it, or the like. De formatione verborum. QUATUOR sunt termina- tiones verbi, a quibus reliquæ omnes formantur; viz. o præ- sentis, i præteriti, um supini, et re infinitivi, hoc modo; 1. Ab o formantur am et em. 2. Ab i formantur ram, rim, ro, sse, et ssem. 3. Ab um formantur u, us, et rus. 4. A re formantur reliquæ' omnes; nempe, bam, bo, rem, #, e, i, ns, dus, dum, di, do. 1 Of the formation of verbs.' THERE are four termina- tions of a verb, from which all' the rest are formed; namely o of the present, i of the preterite, um of the supine, and re of the infinitive, after this manner : em. 1. From o are formed am and 2. From i, ram, rim, ro, sse, and ssem. 3. U, us, and rus are formed from um. 4. All other parts from re do come; as, bam, bo, rem, a, e, and i, ns and dùs, dum, do, and di. In every complete verb there are commonly four principal parts, viz. the present of the indicative in o, the preterite or perfect in i, the first supine in um, and the présent of the infi- F .62 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. ་ nitive in re. The first (which is therefore called the theme or root of the verb) gives origin to the whole verb, either mediately or immediately. The preterite, the first supine, and the present of the infinitive, come from it immediately, and all the rest from them; except the future of the indicative in am, and the present of the subjunctive in em or am, which by this scheme are also formed immediately from the present in o. It is to be noted, that the preterites and supines of the first conjugation end commonly in avi and atum, of the second im ui and itum, and of the fourth in ivi and itum. But the third conju- gation cannot be reduced to any general rule, and there are a great many exceptions in the other three, which are therefore to be learned by daily practice, till the scholar is advanced to that part of grammar that treats particularly of them. But the present of the infinitive, and all the other parts of the verb, are regularly formed after one fixed and uniform manner. In the foregoing rules of formation, I have for the ease of the memory, put the terminations instead of the moods and tenses; but for the greater plainness they may be thus expressed. I. From the present of the indicative are formed the future of the indicative of the third and fourth conjugations in am, and the present of the subjunctive of the first in em, and of the other three in am. II. From the perfect of the indicative are formed the plu-per- fect of it, the perfect, plu-perfect and future of the subjunctive, and the perfect of the infinitive. III. From the first supine are formed the last supine, the participle perfect and the future active. IV. From the present of the infinitive are formed the imper- fect of the indicative, the future of the same when it ends in bo, (viz. in the first and second conjugations,) the imperfect of the subjunctive, the imperative, the participles present and future passive, and the gerunds. NOTE 1. That verbs in io of the third conjugation retain ¿ before unt, unto, ebam, am, ens, endus, endum; but lose it in the present of the infinitive, and imperfect of the subjunctive. NOTE 2. That the last person plur. of the imperative may be formed by adding o to the same person of the present of the indicative; as, Amant, amanto; docent, docento. NOTE 3. That the passive voice is formed from the same tenses of the active, (except where sum is used) by adding r to o, or changing m into r. NOTE 4. That the present of the infinitive passive of the third conju gation may be formed by taking s from the second person of the present PART II. CHAP. III. OF VERB. 63 of the indicative active; as, legis, legi; or, when the verb is deponent, by changing or, or ior, into i; as, Proficiscor, proficisci : morior, mori. NOTE 5. That the present of the infinitive active, and the second per- son of the indicative and imperative passive in re, are always the same. NOTE 6. That the second person plural of the present of the indica- tive, and of the imperative, are the same in the passive voice. NOTE 7. That where any of the principal parts are wanting, those parts are commonly wanting that come from them. For which reason grammarians give supines to a great many verbs, which yet are not to be found in any author, because the participles formed from them are found: And they suppose, likewise, all deponent verbs of old to have had the active voice, and consequently supines, though now lost. NOTE 8. That all verbs of the second conjugation end in eo, and all verbs of the fourth in io, except eo and queo. There are eight verbs in eo of the first conjugation, viz. beo, creo, screo, meo, calceo, laquea, nauseo, nucleo. There are twenty-four in io of the first, viz. amplio, busin, brevio, concilio, crucio, furio, glacio, hio, lanio, tuxurio, macio, nuncio, pio, propitio, radio, repudio, satio, saucio, socio, somnio, spolio, suavin, or rather suavior, vario, vitio; with some others less common, as, decurio, succenturio, fuscio, retulio, strio, tertio, &c. and twelve of the third, viz. capio, facio, jacio, lacio, specio, fodio, fugio cupro, rapiò, sapio, pario, quatio, with their compounds. It is not, in my opinion, necessary to trouble the learner with a par- ticular account how the respective changes in the moods, tenses, num- bers and persons are made; they being obvious from the examples above, in which I have distinguished them from the body, or essential part of the verb, by a division or hyphen. And perhaps this alone, without any other particular rule, might be a sufficient direction. For to conjugate one verb by the example of another, we have no more to do, but instead of the essential part of the one (which is all that stands before o, co, or ia, of the present of the indicative) to substitute the essential part of the other, and then to add to it the additional syllables it receives in conjugation as before. Only we are to advert, 1. That in the preterites and supines, and the parts that come from them, we are to reckon all before and um for the body of the verb, adding the usual syllables to it, as in the active voice of lego. 2. In verbs in io we are to retain or omit the i, as in Note 1. There is yet another way of the formation of verbs, differing only from the first method in this, that what parts according to it are formed from the infinitive, are by this formed from the first or second person of the present of the indicative. But though this may be the more na- tural way, yet the other is more easy and uniform. De Verbis Irregularibus. IRREGULARIA verba vul- go recensentur octo, viz. sum, eo, queo, volo, nolo, malo, fero, & fio, cum compositis. Of Irregular Verbs. THE irregular verbs are com- monly reckoned eight, viz. sum, eo, queo, volo, nolo, malo, fero, and fio, with their compounds 64 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. SUM. Sum, fui, esse, To be. SUBJUNCTIVUS. INDICATIVUS. Præsens. Sum, I am, Sim, Es. Thou art, Sis, Est: He is : Sit: He may or can be; I may or can be, Thou mayst or canst be, Sumus, We are, Simus, We may or can be, Estis: Sunt. Ye are, They are. Sitis, Ye may or can be, Sint. They may or can be. Imperfectum. Eram, I was, Eras, Thou wast, Esses, Essem, I might, &c. be, Thou mightst be, Erat: He was: Esset: He might be: Eramus, We were, Essemus, We might be, Eratis, Ye were, Erant. They were. Essetis, Ye might be, Fssent. They might be. Perfectum. Fui, I have been, Fuisti, Fuit: He hath been: Fuimus, Fuistis, Fuerunt, vel -ère. Fuĕrim, Thou hast been, Fueris, We have been, Fuĕrimus, Ye have been, Fuerits, They have been. Fuerint. I may have been, Thou mayst have been, He may have been: We may have been, Ye may have been, They may have been. Plusquam-perfectum. Fuĕram, I had been, Fuissem, I might have been, Fueras, Thou hadst been, Fuisses, Thou mightst have been, Fuerat: He had been : Fueramus, We had been, Fueratis, Ye had been, Fuerant. They had been. Ero, Fuisset: He might have been. Fuissemus, We might have been, Fuissetis, Ye might have been, Fuissent. They might have heen. Futurum. I shall or will be, Eris, Thou shalt or wilt be, Erit: He shall or will be: Erimus, We shall or will be, Eritis, Ye shall or will be, Erunt. They shall or will be. Fuĕro, Fueris, Fuerit: I shall have been, Thou shalt have been, He shall have been: Fuerimus, We shall have been, Fueritis, Ye shall have been, Fuerint, They shall have been. Fuerit: PART II. CHAP. III. OF VERB. $5 Præsens. IMPERATIvus. Es vel Be thou. Esto, S Esto: Let him be. Este vel? Be ye. Estōte, INFINITIVUS. Præs. Esse, Perf. Fuisse, Fut. Futurus, Fut. Futurus, 2 Fut. } esse vel fuisse. 1 To.be, To have been. To be about to PARTICIPIUM. be. Sunto. Let them be. Fut. Futurus, About to be. The compounds of sum are, adsum, absum, desum, intersum, præsum, obsum, subsum, supersum, insum, prosum, and possum. The first eight are conjugated as the simple sum: insum wants the preterite and its descendants; for we do not use infui, infu- isti, infueram, &c. ¶ PROSUM, To do good, has a d where sum begins with e; as, Pr. Pro-sum, prod-es, -est: pro-sumus, prod-estis, pro-sunt. IND. Im. Prod-èram, prod-eras, prod-erat: prod-eramus, SUB. &c. Im. Prod-essem, prod-esses, prod-esset: prod-essemus, &c. IMPER. Prod-esto, prod-este. INFIN. Præs. Prod-esse. Possum should be pot-sum (as being compounded of postis, able, and sum) but for the better sound t is changed into s be- fore another s, and retained before any other letter: And for the same reason s is always taken away. Possem and posse are contracted for potessem, potesse, which yet are to be found in some old authors; thus, f Possum, potui, posse, To be able. INDICATIVUS. Pr. Possum, potes, potest: possumus, potestis, possunt. Im. Poteram, poteras, poterat : poteramus, poteratis, poterant. Per. Potui, potuisti, potuit: potuimus, potuistis, potuerunt v. uere. Pl. Potueram, potueras,potuerat: potueramus,potueratis, potuérant. Fut. Potero, poteris, poterit: poterimus, poteritis, poterunt. SUBJUNCTIVUS. Præs. Possim, possis, possit : possimus, possitis, possint. Imp. Possem, posses, posset: 'possemus, possetis, possent. Perf. Potuerim, potueris,,potuerit: potuerimus, potueritis, potuerint. Plus. Potuissem,potuisses,potuisset: potuissemus,potuissetis, potuissent. Fut. Potuero, potueris, potuerit: potuerimus, potueritis, potuerint. Pres, Posșe. INFINITIVUS. Per. Potuisse. EO. Eo, ivi, itum, ire, To go. The rest wanting. 2. INDICATIVUS. Præs. Eo, is, .it; imus, itis, eunt.- Imp. Ibam, ibas, ibat; ibamus, ibatis, ibant. F.2 66 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. ivisti, ivit; ivimus, ivistis, iverunt, v.ivere. Plus. Ivěram, iveras, iverat ; iveramus, iveratis, iverant. ibis, ibit; ibimus, ibitis, ibunt. Perf. Ivi, Fut. Ibo, Præs. Eam, eas, ires, SUBJUNCTIVUS. eat: eamus, eatis, eant. iret; iremus, iretis, • Imp. Irem, irent. Perf. Iverim, iveris, iverit; iverimus, iveritis, iverint. Plus. Ivissem, ivisses, ivisset; ivissemus, ivissetis, ivissent. Fut. Ivero, iveris, iverit; iverimus, IMPERATIVUS. iveritis, iverint. INFINITIVUS. Præs. {ito, ito ; Site, Zitote, Præs. Ire. eunto. Perf. Ivisse. Fut. Iturus esse vel fuisse. PARTICIPIA. Præs. Iens, Gen. euntis. Fut. Iturus, -a, -um. SUPINA. 1. Itum. 2. Itu. GERUNDIA. Eundum. Eundi. Eundo. NOTE 1. That in general eo is a verb of the fourth conjugation. NOTE 2. That of old verbs of the fourth had their imperfect in ibam and future in ibo, of which there are many examples in Plautus and Terence, and some in Virgil and Horace. After the same manner the compounds of eo are conjugated, viz. Adeo, abeo, exeo, obeo, redeo, subeo, pereo, coëo, ineo, præco, anteeo, prodeo, prætereo, tránseo; Adibam, adibo, adiens, adeuntis, adeundum, &c. But ambio is a regular verb of the fourth conjugation. NOTE, That in the compounds ivi, ivisti, &c. are seldom used, but they are contracted into iî, iisti; as, adii, adiisti, and sometimes adisti : -So adieram, adierim, &c. Queo, I can, and nequeo, I cannot, are conjugated the same way as eo, they only want the imperative and the gerunds; and the participles are scarcely in use. Præs. Volo, VOLO. Volo, volui, velle, To will, or be willing. INDICATIVUS. vis, vult; volumus, vultis, volunt. Imp. Vol-ebam, -ebas, -ebat; -ebamus, -ebatis, -ebant. Perf. Vol-ui, -uisti, -uit; -uimus, -uistis, -uerunt v. -uere. Plus. Vol-ueram, -ueras, -uerat; -ueramus, -ueratis,-uerant. Fut. Volam, voles, volet; volemus, voletis, volent. Pros. Velim, Imp. Vellem, SUBJUNCTIVUS. velis, velit; velimus, velītis, velint. velles, vellet; vellemus, velletis, vellent. PART II, CHAP. III. OF VERB. 67 Perf. Vol-uerim, ueris, uerit; -uerimus, ueritis, -uerint. Plus. Vol-uissem, -uisses, -uisset ; -uissemus, -uissetis, -uissent. Fut. Vol-uero, -ueuis, -uerit; -uerimus, -ueritis, -uerint. INFINITIVUS. Præs. Velle. Perf. Voluisse. PARTICIPIUM. Pros. Volens. The rest wanting. NOLO. Pr. Nolo, Nolo, nolui, nolle, To be unwillng. INDICATIVUS, non-vis, non-vult; nol-umus, non-vultis, nolunt. Im. Nol-ebam, -ebas, -ebat; -ebamus, -ebatis, -ebant. Per. Nol-ui, -uisti, -uit; -uimus, -uistis, -uerunt, v. -uere. Pl. Nol-ueram, -ueras, -uerat; -ueramus, -ueratis, -uerant. noles, nolet; nolemus, noletis, nolent. Fut. Nolam, SUBJUNCTIVUS. Pr. Nolim, nolis, nolit; nolīmus, nolītis, nolint, Im. Nollem, nolles, nollet; nollemus, nolletis, nollent. Per. Nol-uerim, ueris, uerit; -uerimus, -ueritis, -uerint. Pl. Nol-uissem, -uisses, -uisset; -uissemus, -uissetis, -uissent, Fut. Nol-uero, -ueris, uerit; -uerimus, -ueritis, -uerint. Pr. IMPERATIVUS. INFINITIVUS. S Noli, S nolīte, Pr. Nolle. Nolite, nolitote, Per. Noluisse, The rest wanting. MALO. PARTICIPIUM. Pr. Nolens. Malo, malui, malle, To be more willing. INDICATIVUS. Pr. Malo, mavis, mavult; mulŭmus, mavultis, malunt. Im. Mal-ebam, -ebas, -ebat; -ebamus, -ebatis, -ebant. Per. Mal-ui, -uisti, -uit; -uimus, -uistis, -uerunt, v. -uere. Pl. Mal-ueram, -ueras, -uerat; -ueramus, -ueratis, -uerant. -es, -et, &c. This is scarcely in use. Fut. Malam, Pr. Malim, Im. Mallem, SUBJUNCTIVUS. malis, malit; malimus, malitis, malint. malles, mallet; mallemus, malletis, Per. Mal-uerim, ueris, -uerit; uerint, ueritis, mallent.. -uerint. 68 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. Pl. Mal-uissem,-aisses, -uisset ; -uissemus, -uissemus, -uissent. Fut. Mal-uero, -ueris, -uerit; -uerimus, ueritis, -uerint. Pr. Malle. INFINITIVUS. Per. Maluisse. NOTE, That volo, nolo, and malo, retain something of the third conju- gation, for vis, vult, vultis, are contracted of volis, volit, volitis; and o changed into u, for of old they said volt, voltis. Nolo is compounded of non-volo, and malo of magis volo. Fr. Fero; FERO. VOX ACTIVA. Fero, tuli, lātum, ferre, To bring or suffer. INDICATIVUS. fers, fert; ferimus, fertis, ferunt. Imp. Ferebam, ferebas, ferebat ; ferebamus, ferebatis, ferebant. Per. Tuli, tulisti, tulit; tulimus, tulistis, tulerunt v. ere: Pl. Tuleram, tuleras, tulerat ; tuleramus, tuleratis, tulerant. Fut. Feram, feres, feret; feremus, feretis, ferent. SUBJUNCTIVUS. Pr. Feram, feras, ferat; feramus, feratis, ferant. Im. Ferrem, ferres, ferret; ferremus, ferretis, ferrent. Per. Tul-erim, -eris, erit; -erimus, eritis, -erint. Pl. Tul-issem, -isses, isset; -issemus, -issetis, -issent. Fut. Tul-ero, -eris, erit; Pr. IMPERATIVUS. Sferte, S Fer, ferto; {fertote, Ferto, PARTICIPIA. erimus, ferunto. eritis, -erint. INFINITIVUS. Pr. Ferre. Per. Tulisse. Fut. Laturus esse ¿vel fuisse. GERUNDIA. Pr. Ferens. SUPINA. 1. Latum. Ferendum. { Ferendi. Ferendo. Fut. Laturus. -A. um. 2. Latu. VOX PASSIVA. Feror, latus, INDICATIVUS. ferri. ( ferris, fertur: ferimur, ferimini, feruntur: Pr. Eerror, ferre, PART II. CHAP. III. OF VERB. 69 Ş-ebaris, -ebatur; -ebamur, -ebamini, ebantur. Im. Fer-ebar, {ebare, Per. Latus sum vel fui, latus es vel fuisti, &c. Pl. Latus eram vel fueram, latus eras vel fueras, &c. Fut. Ferar, Pr. Ferar, Im. Ferrer, Sferēris, ferère, feretur; feremur, ferimini, ferentur. SUBJUNCTIVUS. Sferaris, feratur; feramur, feramini, ferantur. ferare, (ferreris, feraetur; ferremur, ferremini, ferrentur. ferrere, Per. Latus sim vel fuerim, latus sis vel fueris, &c. Pl. Latus essem vel fuissem, latus esses vel fuisses. Fut. Latus fuero, latus fueris, &c. IMPERATIVUS. Pr. Ferre, fertor; Fertor, ferimini, feruntor. PARTICIPIA. INFINITIVUS. Pr. Ferri. Per. Latus esse vel fuisse. Fut. Latum iri. Per. Latus, -8, -um. Fut. Ferendus, -a, -um. NOTE, That fero, is a verb of the third conjugation, fers, fert, fertis, ferto, ferte, ferrem, ferre, ferris, fertur, fertar, being contracted of feris, ferit, feritis, ferito, ferite, fererem, ferere, fereris, feritur and feritor. Also fer is contracted of fere: Which in like manner has happened to the imperatives of dico, duco, facio, they having dic, duc, fac, instead of dice, duce, face. The compounds of fero are conjugated the same way as the simple; as, affero, attuli, allatum; aufero, abstuli, ablatum; differo, distuli, dila- tum; confero, contuli, collatum; infero, intuli, illatum; offero, obtuli, blatum; effero, extuli, elatum; So circumfero, perfero, transfero, defero, profero, antefero, præfero. FIO. Fio, factus, fieri, To be made,, or to become. Pr. Fio, fis, INDICATIVUS. fit; fimus, fitis, fiunt. Imp. Fiebam, fiebas, fiebat; fiebamus, fiebatis, fiebant. Per. Factus sum vel fui, factus es vel fuisti, &c. Pl. Factus eram vel fueram, factus eras vel fueras, &c. Fut. Fiam, fies, fiet; fiemus, fietis, fient. 70 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. Pr. Fiam, SUBJUNCTIVUS. fias, fiat; fiamus, fiatis, fiant. Im. Fierem, fieres, fieret; fieremus, fieretis, fierent. Per. Factus sim vel fuerim, factus sis vel fuisses, &c. Pl. Fatus essem vel fuissem, factus esses vel fueris, &c. Fut. Factus fuero, factus fueris, &c. IMPERATIVUS. INFINITIVUS. fite, Pr. Fieri. fiunto. fito; {fitote, Pr. Fito, SFi,* PARTICIPIA. Per. Factus, -a, -um. Fut, Faciendus, -a, -um. | Per. Factus esse vel fuisse. Fut. Factum iri. SUPINUM. Factu. NOTE 1. That fio is the passive of facio, to make, (which is regular) instead of fucior, which is not in use: Yet the compounds of fucio, which change a into i are regular; as, afficior, affectus, affici; perficior, perfectus, perfici. NOTE 2. That the compounds of facio, with verbs, nouns or adverbs, retain the a, and have their imperative act. fac, and their passive form (when used) fio; as, Califucio, lucrifacio, benefacio,; calefuc, calefio, &c. But those compounded with a preposition change the a into i, and have fice and ficior. There are some compounded of fucio and a noun, where facio is changed into fico of the first conjugation; aș magnifico, signi- fico. To the irregular verbs may be reduced edo, to eat, which in some of its parts falls in with the verb sum; thus, IND. Præs. Edo, es, est; SUB. Imp. Essem, esses, esset; IMP. Es vel esto, INFIN. Esse. estis, essemus, essetis, essent. este vel estote. Likewise its compounds, comedo, comes, comest, &c. and exedo, exes, exest, &c. But all these may likewise be regularly conjugated, edo, edis, edit, &c. Ederem, ederes, ederet, &c. OF DEFECTIVE VERBS. THOUGH some of the irregular verbs already mentioned want some of their parts, and upon that account may be called also defective verbs, yet by defective verbs here we chiefly un- * Though £ is_rejected by some grammarians of great note, yet we have given it a place here, not only because it is to be found in Plautus, but also in Horace, Lib. 2. Sat. 5. ver. 38. Fi cognitor ipse, according to the best manuscripts and editions. PART. II. CHAP. III.. OF VERB. 71 derstand such as want considerable branches, or are used only in few tenses and persons. We shall set down those that most frequently occur. I. Aio, I say; inquam, I say; forem, I should be; ausim, I dare; faxim, I'll see to it, or I will do it; ave and salve, God save you, Hail, Good-morrow; cedo, tell or give me; quæso, S Præs. Aio, I pray. ais, IND. Imp. Ai-ebam, -ebas, Perf. - aisti, SUB. Præs. INDIC. IMPERAT, ai. aiunt. ait; -ebat; -ebamus, -ebatis, ebant. aias, aiat; Præs. Inquam, inquis, inquit; inquimus, inquitis, inquiunt. Imp. Perf. Fut. - SUB. {Imp. Plus. aiatis, aiant. [PARTICIP. Proes. aiens.] inquiebat; inquiebant. inquisti, inquies, inquiet; PARTICIP. Prœs. inquiens. IMPERAT. inque, -ito. Forem, fores, foret; foremus, foretis, forent. INF, Fore, to be, or to be about to be, the same with futurus esse. Præs. Ausim, ausis, ausit; SUB. Perf. Faxim, faxis, faxit; Fut. Faxó, faxis, faxit; faxint. faxitis, faxint. NOTE, That fuxim and faxo are used instead of fecerim and fecero. Ave, I avēte, IMPERAT. Avēto, Salve, Salvēto, ¿Cedo, avetote, salvete, salvetote, cedite, Savere. INFIN. salvère. INDIC. Præs. Quæso, quæsumus. II. These three verbs, odi, memini, cœpi, have only the preterite tense, and what is formed from it, and therefore are by some called preteritive verbs; thus, Ödi, oderam, oderim, odissem, odero, odisse. Memini,memineram,meminerim,meminissem,meminero,meminesse, Copi, cœperam, cœperim, cœpissem, cœpero, cœpisse. But under these they comprehend also the signification of the other tenses; as, memini, I remember or I have remembered; memineram, I remembered, or I had remembered, &c. So Odi, I hate, or I have hated: Copi, I begin, or I have begun. Though I am not fully satisfied as to this last, for I do not know any example where cœpi doth clearly signify the present tense 72 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. Memini hath also the imperative memento, Remember thou; mementote, Remember ye. Some add meminens, Remembering, which is scarcely to be imitated. To these some add novi, because it frequently hath the signi- fication of the present, I know, as well as I have known; though it comes from nosco, which is complete. NOTE 1. That odientes is to be found in Petronius; odiatur in Seneca ;- cæpio in Plautus and Terence.-See Yoss. Analog. Lib. iii. cap. 39. NOTE 2. That the participles captus and osus, with its compounds perosus, exosus, are in use among the best authors; but perodi and exodi are not. III. Faris, To speak, wants the first person of the present indicative, and perhaps the whole present of the subjunctive, for we do not say for or fer, and rarely feris, fetur, &c. So likewise daris and deris, but not dor or der, To be given. The compounds of the first, as, effor, affor, are rare; but the com- pounds of the other, as, addor, reddor, are common. IV. Most of the other defective verbs are but single words, and rarely to be found but among poets; as, infit, he begins; defit, it is wanting. Some are compounded of a verb with the conjunction si, as sis for si vis, If thou wilt; sultis, for si vultis, If ye will; sodes, for si audes, If thou darest. OF IMPERSONAL VERBS. THESE are also a kind of defective verbs, which for the most part are used only in the third person sing. They have the sign it before them in English; as, penitet, it repents; pla- cet, it pleases: And are thus conjugated: Future. Præs. Imperfect. Perfect. Plusquam. IND. Pœnitet, pœnitebat, pœnituit, pœnituerat, pœnitebit. SUB. Pœniteat, pœniteret, poenituerit, pœnituisset, pœnituerit. INF. Pœnitere, pœnituisse. Most verbs may be used impersonally in the passive voice, especially such as otherwise have no passive; as, Præsi Imperfect. Perfect. Plusquam. Futur. Ind. Pugnatur, pugnabatur, pugnatum, Sub. Pugnatur, pugnaretur, pugnatum, Inf. Pugnari, Sest, Serat, -atum fuit, S sit, -atum fuerit, pugnatum,{esisse, fuerat, pugna- bitur. Sesset, -atum- fuisset, fuerit. pugnatum iri. NOTE 1. That impersonals are applied to any person or number, by putting that which´stands before other verbs, after the impersonals in PART II. CHAP IV. OF PARTICIPLE. 73 the cases which they govern; as, Pœnitet me, te, illum, I repent, thou repentest, he repenteth, instead of ego paniteo, &c. which is scarcely Latin. Placet mihi, tibi, illi, It pleases me, thee, him; or, I please, thou pleasest, &c. Pugnatur a me, a te, ab illo, I fight, thou fightest, he fighteth, &c. NOTE 2. That impersonals are not used in the imperative, but instead of it we take the subjunctive. NOTE 3. That impersonal verbs are very often used personally especially in the plural number; as, accidit, contingit, evenit, pertinet, decet, do- lit, licet, nocet, patet, placet, præstat, &c. For we say, Tu mihi sola places; Nulli noceo; Multa homini accidunt, contingunt, eveniunt; Par- vum parva decent, &c. But 'tis to be remarked, that they are generally impersonal, when an infinitive or subjunctive mood follow; for though I can say, Tu places mihi, yet I cannot say, Si places audire, but Si placet tibi audire. Again, we cannot say Ego contigi esse domi, but, Me contigit esse domi, or Mihi contigit esse domi. Likewise Evenit illum mori, or Ut ille moreretur; but not Ille evenit mori. [I shall not here inquire what is the word understood to impersonal verbs, whether it is a noun of the like signification; as, Pugna pugnatur, or the word res or negotium, or the infinitive mood. Though I incline to think that any one of these will not answer to them all, but that there are some to which the first, to others the second, and to others the third, may be most fitly understood, as the nature of the verb and good sense shall direct us. This we are sure of, that the word under- stood can never be a person properly so called, but a thing; for which reason, and the want of two primary persons, viz. the first and second, they are called impersonal, though some are much offended with the name.] CAP. IV. De Participio. TRIA sunt præcipue consi- deranda in participio, viz, tem- pus, significatio et declinatio. I. Tempora participiorum sunt tria, præsens, præteritum et futurum. Particip. Præs. Præt. Fut. Temp. de- sinunt in ns. tus, sus, xus. rus, dus. II. Significatio participiorum CHAP. IV. Of Participle. THERE are three things es- pecially to be considered in a participle, viz. time, significa- tion and declension. I. The tenses of participles are three, the present, preterite and future. Particip. of the Pres. Præt.< Fut. Tense end in ns. tus, sus, xus rus, dus. II. The signification of par- est vel activa vel passiva, vel ticiples is either active or pas- G 74 J RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. neutra, ad modum verborum asive, or neuter, after the man quibus descendunt. ner of the verbs from which Participia. (in ns, et rus plerumque sunt activa. in dus semper passiva. in tus, sus, aus, plerumque sunt passiva, interdum vero activa, vel etiam cominunia. : they come. Participles. in ns and rus are generally active. in dus always passive. in tus, sus, xus, are gene- rally passive, sometimes active, or also common. III. Omnia participia sunt III. All participles are ad- adjectiva: quæ desinunt in nsjectives: Those which end in sunt tertiæ declinationis, reli-ns are of the third declension, qua autem omnia primæ et se- but all the rest are of the first cundæ. and second. A participle is a kind of adjective formed from a verb, which in its signification always imports some time. It is so called because it partakes of a noun and a verb, hav- ing genders and cases from the one, time and signification from the other, and number from both. 1. Active verbs [See Chap. ix.] have two participles, one of the present time ending in ns; as, Amans, Loving: And ano- ther of the future ending in rus; as, Amaturus, About to love. Passive verbs have likewise two participles, one of the pre- terite ending in tus, sus, or xus; as, Amatus, Loved; Visus, Seen; Flexus, Bowed, (to which some add one in uus, viz. Mortuus, Dead:) And another of the future ending in dus; as, Amandus, To be loved. 3. Neuter verbs have two participles, as the active; as, Se- dens, Sitting, Sessurus, About to sit. 4. Active intransitive verbs have frequently three participles: as, Carens, Wanting, Cariturus, About to want, Caren- dus, To be wanted; Dolens, Grieving; Doliturus, About to grieve; Dolendus, To be grieved: And sometimes four; as, Vi- gilans, Watching; Vigilaturus, about to watch; Vigilatus, watched; Vigilandus, to be watched. 5. Deponent and Common verbs have generally four participles; as, Loquens, Speaking; Locuturus, about to speak; Locutus, having spoken; Loquendus, to be spoken; Dignans, vouchsafing; Dignaturus, about to vouchsafe; Dignatus, having vouchsafed, or being vouchsafed; Dignandus, to be vouchsafed. PART II. CHAP IV. OF PARTICIPLE. 75 1 NOTE 1. That in some Deponent verbs the participle perfect hath both an active and passive signification, though that of the verb itself is only active; as, testatus, having testified, or being testified. So Mentitus, Meditatus, Oblitus, &c. } NOTE 2. That it is essential to a participle, 1. That it come immediately from a verb. 2. That in its signification it also in- clude time. Therefore, Tunicatus, coated; Larvatus, masked, and such like, are not participles, because they come from nouns, and not from verbs. And Ignārus, ignorant; Elegans, neat; Circumspectus, circumspect; Tacitus, silent; Falsus, false; Profusus, prodigal, &c. are not participles, because they do not signify time. There are a kind of adjective nouns ending in undus, which approach very near to the nature of participles, such as Erra- bundus, Ludibundus, Populabundus. They are formed from the Imperf. of the Indic. and the signification is much the same with the participle of the present time; only they signify Abun- dance or a great deal of the action, according to A. Gellius, Lib. 11. Cap. 15. or according to others, they signify the same with the participles of frequentative verbs, when these are not See Gronovius on Gellius, as above cited. in use. APPENDIX OF GERUNDS AND SUPINES. Gerunds and Supines (which, because of their near relation to verbs, are by some not improperly called participle words) are a sort of substantive nouns, expressing the action of the verb in general, or in the abstract. Gerunds are substantives of the second declension, and complete in all their cases, except the vocative. Supines are substantives of the fourth declension, having only two cases, the accusative in um, which makes the first Supine, and the ablative in u, which makes the second. [Vossius, Lib. 8. Cap. 54, thinks that the last supine may sometimes be a Dative; as, Durum tactu, i, e. tactui; for the da- tives of the fourth declension of old ended in u. Also Lib. 7. Cap. 8. he takes notice, that though these supines have sometimes other cases, (as irrisui esse) yet they are only reckoned supines by gram- marians when the first come after verbs of motion, and the second after adjective nouns; thus dignus irrisu is a supine (according to them) Non sine irrisu audientium, is not.] 76 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. De Indeclinabilibus Partibus | Of the indeclinable parts of IN Orationis. CAP. V. De Adverbio. Adverbio potissimum spectanda est ejus Significatio. Adverbiorum Significationes variæ sunt: earum vero præci- puæ ad sequentia capita revo- cari possunt. Speech. CHAP. V. Of Adverb. IN an adverb is chiefly to be considered its signification. The significations of adverbs are various: but the chief of them may be reduced to the fol- lowing heads. Adverb is an indeclinable part of speech, which being joined to a noun, verb, or other adverb, expresses some circumstance, quality, or manner of their signification. I. Adverbs denoting circumstance are chiefly those of place, time, and order. PART 11. CHAP V. OF ADVERB. 77 1. Adverbs of PLACE are five-fold, |2. Adverbs of TIME are three-fold (or rest) (1) in a place. viz. Adverbs signifying motion. (UBI? Hic, Illic, Where? Here. Istic, There. Ibi, Within. Without. Intus, Foris, Ubique, Nusquam, Alicubi Alibi, Ubivis, LIbidem, Quo ? Huc, Illuc, Istuc, Intro, Every where. No where. Some where. Else where. Any where. In the same place. Whether ? Hither. {Thither. To within. Foras, To without. Eo, 2 Past, 1 Pre- viz. such as signify, sent. (1) Being in time either, SNUNC, Hodie, TUNC, Tum, Heri, Dudum, Pridem, Pridie, Now. To day. {Then. Yesterday. {Heretofore. The day before. Nudius tertius, Three days agõ, Nuper, Lately. JANJAM, Presently. Mox, Immediately. Statim, By and by. Protinus, Instantly. Illico, CRAS, Straightway To-morrow. (3) towards a place. (2) to a place. Alio, Aliquo, Eodem, QUORSUM ?· Versus, Horsum, Illorsum, Sursum, Deorsum, Antrorsum, Retrorsum, (5) through (4) from a place. or by a place. To that place. To another place. To some place. To the same place. Whitherward ? Towards. Hitherward. Thitherward. Upward. Downward. Forward. Backward. Dextrorsum, To the right hand. Sinistrorsum, To the left hand. From whence? From hence. UNDE? Hinc, Illinc, Isthinc, Inde, From thence. Aliunde, Alicunde, Sicunde, Untrinque, Superne, Inferne, Cœlitus, Funditus, (Qua? From elsewhere. From some place. If from any place. On both sides. From above. From below. From Heaven. From the ground. Which way? This way. Hac, Illac, Isthac, {That way. LAlia, Another way. 4 Indefinite. 3 Future remote; very near. Postridie, The day after. Perendie, Two days hence. Nondum, Not yet. QUANDO? Aliquando, When? Nonnunquam, Sometimes. Ever. Interdum, Semper, Nunquam, Never. Interim, Quotidie, In the mean time: Daily. (2.) Continuance of time. QUAMDIU? Diu, Tamdiu, Jamdiu, Jamdudum, Jampridem, (3) Vicissitude or QUOTIES? Sæpe, Raro, 1 Indefinite Definite or How long? Long. So long. Long ago. repetition of time. How often? Often. Seldom. So often. Toties, Aliquoties, Vicissum, Alternatim, For several times, { {Again. Rursus, Iterum, Subinde, By turne. Indentidem, {Ever and anon, SEMEL, Once. Number. Bis, Ter, Twice. Thrice. Quater. Four times, &öf G-2 78 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. Inde, Then. 3. Adverbs of ORDER; as, Deinceps, So forth. Deinde, Thereafter. Denuo, Of new. Dehinc, Henceforth. Denique, Finally. Porro, Moreover. Postremo, Lastly. Primò, -ùm, First. Secundò, -ùm, Secondly. Tertiò, -ùm, Thirdly. Quartò, -ùm, Fourthly. II. The other adverbs expressing QUALITY, MANNER, &c. are either absolute or comparative. ABSOLUTE, denoting, Comparative, denoting, 1. Quality simply; as, Bene, well; male, ill; fortiter, bravely : And innumerable others that come from adjective nouns, or par- ticiples. 2. Certainty; as, Profectò, certè, sanè, planè, næ, utique, ita, etiam, truly, verily, yes; quidni, why not? omnino, certainly. 3. Contingence; as, Forte, forsan, fortassis, fors, happily, perhaps, by chance, peradventure. 4. Negation; as, Non, haud, not; nequaquam, not at all; neuti- quam, by no means; minime, nothing less. 5. Prohibition; as, Ne not. 6. Swearing; a8, Hercle, pol, edepol, mecastor, by Hercules, by Pollux, &c. 7. Explaining; as, Utpote, videlicet, scilicet, nimirum, nempe, to wit, namely. 8. Separation; us, Seorsum, apart; separatim, separately; sigilla- tim, one by one; varitim, man by man; oppidatim, town by town, &c. 9. Joining together; as, Simul, unà, pariter, together; generaliter, generally; universaliter, universally; plerumque, for the most part. 10. Indication or Painting out; as, En, ecce, lo, behold, 11. Interrogation; as, Čur, quare, quamobrem, why, wherefore? Num, an, whether? Quomodo, qui, how? To which add, Ubi, quo, quorsum, unde, qua, quando, quamdiu, quoties? 1. Excess; as, Valde, maxime, magnopere, summopere, admodum, oppido, perquam, longe, very much, `exceedingly,`nimis, nimium, too much; prorsus, penitus, omnino, altogether, wholly; magis, more; melius, better; pejus, worse; fortius, more bravely; and optime, best; pessime, worst, fortisseme, most bravely; and in- numerable others of the comparative and superlative degrees. 2. Defect; as, Ferme, ferè, prope, propemodum, penè, almost ;. parum, little; paulo, paullulum, very little. 3. Preference; as, Potius, satius, rather; potissimuum, præcipue, præsertim, chiefly, especially; imo, yes, nay, nay, rather. Likeness or Equality; as, Ita, sic, adeo, so; ut, uti, sicut, sicuti, velut, veluti, ceu, tanquam, quasi, as, as if; quemadmo- dum, even as; satis, enough; itidem, in like manner. 5. Unlikeliness or Inequality, as, Aliter, secus, otherwise; alioqui, or alioquin else; nedum, much more or much less. 6. Abatement; as, Sensim, paullatim, pedetentim, by degrees §. piece-meal, vix, scarcely; ægre, hardly, with difficulty. 7. Exclusion; as, Tantum, solum, modo, tantummodo, duntaxat, demum, only. PART. II. CHAP. VI. OF PREPOSITION. 79 NOTE 1. That adverbs seem originally to have been contrived to ex- press compendiously in one word what must otherwise have required two or more; as, sapienter, wisely, for cum sapientia; hic, for in hoc loco; semper, for in omni tempore; semel, for una vice; bis, for duabus vicibus; Hercule, for Hercules me juvet, &c. Therefore many of them are nothing else but adjective nouns or pronouns, having the preposition and sub- stantive understood; as, quo, eo, eodem; for ad que, ea, eadem [loca], or cui, ei, eidem, [loco]; for of old these datives ended in o. Thus, qua, hac, illac, &c. are plain adjectives in the ablative Sing: Fem. the word via, a way, and in being understood. Many of them are compounds ; as quomodo, i, e. quo modo; quemadmodum, i. e. ad quem modum, quamo- brem, i. e. ob quam rem; quare, i. e. [pro] qua re; quorsum, i. e. versus quem [locum]; scilicet, i. e. scire licet; videlicet, i. e. videre licet; ilicet, 1. e. ire licet; illico, i. e. in loco; magnopere, i. e. magno opere; nimirum, i. e. ni [est] mirum, &c. NOTE 2. That of adverbs of place, those of the first kind answer to the question ubi 2 the second to quo? the third to quorsum? the fourth to unde? and the fifth to qua? To which might be added a sixth, quos- que? How far? answered by usque, until; hucusque, hitherto; eousque, so far; hactenus, hitherto, thus far; Eatenus, so far as; quadantenus, in some measure. But these are equally applied to time and place. NOTE 3. That adverbs of time of the first kind answer to quando? of the second to quamdiu, and quamdudum or quampridem ? of the third to quoties? NOTE 4. That adverbs of quality generally answer to the question quo- modo? NOTE 5. That some adverbs of time, place, and order, are frequently used the one for the other; as, ubi, where and when; inde, from that place, from that time, thereafter, next; hactenus, thus far, with respect to place, time, or order, &c. Other adverbs also may be classed under different heads. NOTE 6. That some adverbs of time are either past, present, or future; as, jam, already, now, by and by; olim, long ago, sometime hereafter. NOTE 7. That interrogative adverbs of time and place doubled or with the adjection cunque, answer to the English adjection soever, as, ubiubi, or ubicunque, wheresoever; quoquo, or quocunque, whithersoever, &c. And the same holds also in other interrogative words; as, quisquis, or quicunque, whosoever; quotquot, or quotcunque, how many soever; quan, tus quantus, or quantuscunque, how great soever; qualis qualis, or qua- liscunque, of what kind or quality soever; ut ut, or utcunque, however, or howsoever, &c. CAP. VI. De Præpositione. CHAP. VI. Of Preposition. I. PREPOSITIONES quæ I. The prepositions which regunt accusativum sunt vigin- govern the accusative are twen- ti-octo, viz. ty-eight, viz. 80 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. Ad, To. Infra, Apud, At. Juxta, Beneath. Nigh to. Ante, Before. Ob, For. Adversus, Propter, For, hard by. Adversum, Against. Per, By, through. Contra, Præter, Besides, except. Cis, Penes. In the power of. On this side. Citra, Post, After. Circa, Pone, Behind. About. Circum, Secus, By along. Erga, Towards. Secundum, According to. Extra, Without. Supra, Above. Inter, Between, among. Trans, On the further side. Intra, Within. Ultra, Beyond. II. Præpositiones quæ re- II. The prepositions which gunt ablativum sunt quinde- govern the ablative are fifteen, cim; nempe, A, Ab, Abs, } namely, De, Of, concerning. From. E, Ex, } of, out of. Absque, Without. Pro, For. Cum, With. Præ, Before. · [of. Clam, Without the Palam, Coram, Before. Tenus, knowledge of. Sine, III. Hæ quatuor interdum accusativum, interdum abla- tivum, regunt; In, Sub, In, into. Under. With the knowledge Without. Up to. III. These four govern some- times the accusative, and some- times the ablative; Super, Subter, Above. Beneath. A preposition is an indeclinable word, showing the relation of one substantive noun to another. NOTE 1. That pone and secus rarely occur: and prope, nigh; usque, unto; circiter, about; versus, towards; which are commonly reckoned among the prepositions governing the accusative; and procul, far, among those governing the ablative, are adverbs; and do not govern a case of themselves, but by the preposition ad, which is understood to the first four, and a or ab to the last. To which perhaps may be added, clam, which is joined very frequently with the accusative; as, Clam patre, or patrem; a being understood to the one, and quod ad to the other. Besides the separate use of these prepositions, there is another use arises from them, namely, their being put before a vast number of PART II. CHAP. VII. OF INTERJECTION. 81 nouns and verbs in composition, which creates a great variety, gives a peculiar elegance and beauty to the Latin tongue. and There are five or six syllables, viz. am, di or dis, re, se, con, which are commonly called inseparable prepositions, because they are only to be found in compound words: However, they generally add something to the signification of the words with which they are compounded ; thus, Am, Di, Dis, Re, Se, Con, signifies (round about, asunder, ambio, divello, to surround. to pull asunder. distraho, to draw asunder. as, relego, to read again. aside or apart, together, sepono, concresco, to grow together. again, to lay aside. CHAP. VII. OF INTERJECTION. AN INTERJECTION is an indeclinable word thrown into discourse, to signify some passion or emotion of the mind. (1. Joy; as, Evax, hey, brave, io. Some of them express. 2. Grief; as, Ah, hei, heu, eheu, ah, alas, woes me.. 3. Wonder; as, Papæ, O strange; Vah, hah. 4. Praise; as, Euge, well done. 5. Aversion; as, Apage, away, begone, fy, tush. 6. Exclaiming; as, Oh, Proh, O! 7. Surprise or Fear; as, Atat, ha, aha. 8. Imprecation; as, Væ, wo, pox on't. 9. Laughter; as, Ha, ha, he. 10. Silencing; as, Au, 'st, pax, silence, hush, 'st. 11. Calling; as, Eho, io, ho, soho, ho, O. 12. Derision; as, Hui, away with. 13. Attention; as, Hem, hah. NOTE 1. That the same interjection denotes sometimes one passion, and sometimes another; as, Vah, which is used to express joy, and sorrow, and wonder, &c. NOTE 2. That some of them are natural sounds, common to all lan- guages. NOTE 3. That nouns are used sometimes for interjections; as, Ma- lum! With a pox! With a mischief! Infandum! O shame, fy! fy! Miserum! O wretched! Nefus! O the villainy ! Interjection is a compendious way of expressing a whole sentence in one word; and used only to represent the passions and emotions of the soul, that the shortness of the one might the sooner express the sud- denness and quickness of the other. 82 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. CHAP. VIII. OF CONJUNCTION. A CONJUNCTION is an indeclinable word that joins sen- tences together; and thereby shews their dependence upon one another. Of these some are called, 1. Copulative; as, Et, ac, atque, que, and; etiam, quoque, item, also; cum, tum, both, and. Also their contraries, nec, neque, neu, neve, neither nor. 2. Disjunctive; as, Aut, ve, vel, seu, sive, either, or. 3. Concessive; as, Etsi, etiamsi, tametsi, licet, quanquam, quamvis, tho', altho', albeit. 4. Adversative; as, Sed, verum, autem, at, ast, atqui, but ; tamen, attăinen, veruntămen, verumenimvēro, yet, notwith- standing, nevertheless. 5. Causal; as, Nam, namque, enim, for; quia, quippe, quo- niam, because; quod, that, because. 6. Illative or Rational; as, Ergo, ideo, igitur, idoirco, itaque, therefore; quapropter, quocirca, wherefore; proinde, there- fore; cum, quam, seeing, since; quandoquidem, forasmuch as. 7. Final or perfective; as, Ut, uti, that, to the end that. 8. Conditional; as, Si, sin, if; dum, modo, dummodo, pro- vided; upon condition that; siquidem; if indeed. 9. Exceptive or Restrictive; as, Ni, nisi, unless, except. 10. Diminutive; as, Saltem, certe, at least. 11. Suspensive or Dubitative; as, An, anne, num, whether, ne, annon, whether, not; necne, or not. 12. Expletive; as, Autem, vero, now, truly; quidem, equidem, indeed. 13. Ordinative ; as, Deinde, thereafter; denique, finally; in-, sŭper, moreover; cæterum, moreover, but, however. 14. Declarative; as, Videlicet, scilicet, nempe, nimirum, &c. to wit, namely. NOTE 1. That the same words, as they are taken in different views, are both adverbs. and conjunctions; as, An, anne, &c. are supensive con- junctions and interrogative adverbs. The same may be said of the ordi- native and declarative conjunctions, which under another view may be ranked under adverbs of order and explaining. So likewise utinam, which is commonly called an adverb of wishing, when more narrowly considered, is nothing else but the conjunction use [that] with the syllable PART II. CHAP. IX. APPENDIX, &c. 83 ram added to it; and opto [I wish] understood; as, Utinam adfuisses ; Ut te Deus male perdat; supple opto. But since both of them are inde- clinable, there is no great need of being very nice in distinguishing them. NOTE 2. That other parts of speech compounded together, supply the place of conjunctions; as, Postea, afterwards; præterea, moreover; propterea, because, &c. Which are made up of the prepositions post, præter, and propter, with ea the pronoun. + NOTE 3. That some conjunctions, according to their natural order, stand first in a sentence; as, Et, aut, nec, si, &c. Some contrary to their natural order, stand in the second place. viz. autem, vero, quoque, quidem, enim: And some may indifferently be put either first or second, viz. Namque, etenim, siquidem, ergo, igitur, itaque, &c. Hence arose the division of them into prepositive, subjunctive, and common. ¶ CHAP. IX. APPENDIX, containing some observations concerning the va- rious divisions and significations of words, especially noun and verb. 1. All words whatsoever are either simple or compound. A simple word [simplex] is that which was never more than one; as, Justus, lego. A compound [compositum] is that which is made up of two or more words, or of a word and some syllabical adjection; as, Injustus, perlego, derelinquo, egomet. 2. All words whatsoever are either primitive or derivative.- A primitive word [primitivum] is that which comes from no other word; as, Justus lego. A derivative [derivativum] is that which comes from another word; as, Justitia, lectio. I. Besides the more general divisions of nouns and pronouns, mentioned p. 5. and 26, there are other particular divisions of them, taken from their various significations and derivations: The most remarkable whereof are these : I. With respect to signification. 1. A collective [collectivum] is a substantive noun which sig- nifies many in the singular number; as, populus, a people; exercitus, an army. 2. An interrogative noun or pronoun [interrogativum] is that by which we ask a question; as, Quis? Who? Uter? Which of the two? Qualis? Of what kind? Quantus? How great? Quot? How many? And these, when they are used without a question, are called indefinites. 84 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. 3. A relative noun or pronoun [relativum] is an adjective that has respect to something spoken before, as, Qui, ille, ipse, &c. Alius, alter, reliquus, cætera, -um, qualis, quantus, &c. 4. A partative noun or pronoun [partitivum] is an adjective which signifies many severally, and as it were, one by one; as, Omnis, nullus, quisque, &c. or a part of many; as, Quidam, aliquis, neuter, nemo, &c. 5. A numeral noun [numerale] is an adjective which signifies number, of which there are four principal kinds. (1.) Cardinal, [numerus cardinalis]; as, Unus, duo, tres, &c. (2.) Ordinal, [ordinalis]; as, primus, secundus, tertius, &c. (3.) Distributive, [distributivus]; as, Singuli, bini, terni, (4.) Multiplicative, [multiplicativus]; as, Simplex, duplex, triplex, &c. &c. II. With respect to the signification and derivation. 1. A Patronymic noun [patronymicum] is a substantive noun derived from another substantive proper, signifying one's pedi- gree or extraction; as, Priamides, the son of Priamus; Pri- ǎmis, the daughter of Priamus; Eetias, the daughter of e- tes; Nerine, the daughter of Nereus. Patronymics are gene- rally derived from the name of the father, but the poets (for others seldom use them) derive them also from the grandfather, or some other remarkable person of the family; nay sometimes from the founder of a nation or people, and also from countries and cities; as, Ecides, the son, grandson, great-grandson, or one of the posterity of Eacus; Romulido, the Romans, from their first king Romulus; Sicelis, Troas, a woman of Sicily, of Troy, &c. Patronymics of men end in des; of women in is, as and ne. Those in des and ne are of the first, and those in is and as of the third declension. 2. An abstract noun [abstractum] is a substantive derived from an adjective expressing the quality of that adjective in general, without regard to the thing in which the quality is; as, bonitas, goodness; dulcedo, sweetness: from bonus, good; dulcis, sweet. With respect to these abstracts, the adjectives from which they come are called concretes, because, besides the quality, they also confusedly signify something as the subject of it, without which they cannot make sense. 3. A gentile or patrial noun [gentile or patrium] is an adjec- tive derived from a substantive proper, signifying one's country; as, Scotus, Macědo, Arpīnas, Edinburgensis, Taodunanus; a PART II. CHAP. IX. APPENDIX, &c. 85 man born in Scotland, Macedonia, Arpinumi, Edinburgh, Dun- dee; from Scotia, Macedonia, Arpinum, Edinburgum, Taodu- num. 4. A possessive noun [possessivum] is an adjective derived from a substantive whether proper or appellative, signifying possession or property; as, Scoticus, Herculeus, Paternus, Herilis, Foemineus, of or belonging to Scotland, Hercules, a father, a master, a woman; from Scotia, Hercules, Pater, He- rus, Fœmina. 5. A diminutive noun [diminutivum] is a substantive or ad- jective derived from another substantive or adjective respective- ly, importing a diminution, or lessening of its signification; as, libellus, a little book; chartula, a little paper; opusculum, a a littte work, from liber, charta, opus; parvulus, very little; candidŭlus, pretty white; from parvus, candidus. These for the most part end in lus, la, or lum, and are generally of the same gender with their primitives. 6. A denominative noun [denominativum] is a substantive or adjective derived from another noun; as, Gratia, favour; viněa, a vineyard; senator, a senator; from gratus, vinum, senex : Coelestis, heavenly; humānus, humane; aureus, golden; from cœlum, homo, aurum. 7. A verbal noun [verbale] is a substantive or adjective derived from a verb; as, Amor, love; doctrina, learning; lectio, a les- son; auditus, hearing; from amo, doceo, lego, audio: amabilis, lovely; capax, capable; volucer, swift; from amo, capio volo. 8. Lastly, There are some nouns derived from participles, ad- verbs, and prepositions; as, Fictitius, counterfeit; crastinus, belonging to the morrow; contrarius, contrary; from fictus, cras, contra. NOTE, That the same nouns, according to the different respects in which they are considered, may sometimes be ranked under one, and sometimes under another of the above mentioned classes; as, quis, is is an interrogative, relative or partitive; pietas, an abstract or denomi native. II. Pronouns are divided into four classes, viz. 1. Demonstratives, Ego, tu, sui. 2. Relatives, Ille, ipse, iste, hic, is, quis, qui. 3. Possessives, Meus, tuus, suus, noster, vester. 4. Petrials or Gentiles, Nostras, vestras, cujas. Of them also two are interrogatives, Quis and cujas. H 86 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. III. 1. Verbs with respect to their figure or frame, are either. simple; as, Amo, I love; or, compound; as, Redāmo, 1 love again. 2. With respect to their species or origin, are either primi- tive; as, Lego, I read; or derivative; as, Lectito, I read fre- quently. 3. With respect to their conjugation, are either regular; as, Amo; or irregular; as, Volo, vis, &c. 4. With respect to their constituent parts, are either com- plete; as, Amo: or defective; as, Inquam: or redundant; as, Edo, edis, et es, &c. 5. With respect to their persons, are either personal; as, Amo: or impersonal; as, pœnitet. 6. With respect to their terminations, they end either in o ; as, Amo: or in r; as, Amor: or in m; as, Sum. 7. With respect to their signification, verbs are either sub- stantive or adjective. (1.) A substantive verb [substantivum] is that which signifies simply the affirmation of being or existence; as, Sum, fio, existo, I am. (2.) An adjective verb [adjectivum] is that which together with the signification of being, has a particular signification of its own; as, Amo: i. e. Sum amans, I am loving. An adjective verb is divided into active, passive, and neuter. (1.) An active verb [activum] is that which affirms action of its person or nominative before it; as, Amo, loquor, curro. (2.) A passive verb [passivum] is that which affirms passion of its person or nominative before it; as, Amor. (3.) A neuter verb [neutrum] is that which affirms neither ac- tion nor passion of its nominative; but simply signifies the state, posture, or quality of things; as, Sto, sedeo, maneo, duro, vireo, flaveo, sapio, quiesco, &c. To stand, sit, stay, endure, to be green, to be yellow, to be wise, to rest. An active verb is again divided into transitive and intransi- tive. (1.) An active transitive verb [transitivum] is that whose action passeth from the agent to some other thing; as, Amo, patrem. (2.) An active intransitive verb [intransitivum] is that whose action passeth_not from the agent to any other; as, Curro, I run; ambŭlo, I walk. When to any verb you put the question whom? or what? if a rational answer can be returned, the verb is transitive; as, PART II. CHAP. IX. APPENDIX, &c. 87 Whom or What do you teach? Answer, A boy, the grammar: If not, it is intransitive; as, What do you run, go, come, live, sleep, &c. to which no rational answer can be given, unless it be by a word of like signification, which sometimes indeed these verbs have after them; as, Vivo vitam jucundum, I live a pleasant life; Eo iter longum, I go a long journey. NOTE 1. That the same verb is sometimes transitive, and sometimes intransitive; as, Ver incipit, the spring begins, Cic. Incipere facinus, to begin an action, Plaut. NOTE 2. That neuter and intransitive verbs are often Englished with the sign of the passive verb; as, Caleo, I am hot; Palleo, I am pale; Jacobus abiit, James is gone. NOTE 3. That neuter and intransitive verbs want the passive voice, un- less impersonally used, as the intransitive verbs most frequently and elegantly are; as, pugnatur, itur, ventum est. Though all verbs whatsoever, with respect to their signification, be- long to some one or other of the foregoing classes, yet because gram- marians together with the signification of verbs, are obliged also to consider their termination, and finding that all active verbs did not end in o, neither all passives in or, it was judged convenient to add to the for- mer two or three other classes or kinds of them, viz. deponent, common, and neuter-passive. (1.) A deponent verb [deponens] is that which has a passive termination, but an active or neuter signification; as, Loquor, I speak; Mortor, I die. (2.) A common verb [commune] is that which under a passive termina- tion has a signification either active or passive; as, Criminor, I accuse, or I am accused; Dignor, I think, or I am thought worthy. (3.) A Neuter-passive (neutro passivum] is that which is half active and half passive in its termination, but in its signification is either wholly passive; as Fio, fuctus, sum, to be made: Or wholly active neuter; as, Adeo, ausus, sum, to dare; Gaudeo, gavisus sum, to rejoice 8. To omit the other kinds of derivative verbs, which are not very material, there are three kinds of them derived from verbs, which deserve to be remarked, viz. frequentatives, inceptives, and desideratives. (1.) Frequentatives [verba frequentativa] signify frequency of action. They are formed from the last supine, by changing atu into ito from verbs of the first, and u into o from verbs of the other three conjugations. They are all of the first; as, Clamito, to cry frequently, from clamo; dormito, to sleep often, from dormio. From them also are formed other frequentatives; as, curro, curso, cursito; jacio, jacto, jactito; pello, pulso, pul- sito and pulto. (2.) Inceptives [verba inceptiva] signify that a thing is begun and tending to perfection. They are formed from the second RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. person sing pres. ind. by adding co. They are all of the third conjugation, and want both preterite and supine; as, Caleo, cales, calesco, I grow or wax warm. (3.) Desideratives [verba desiderativa] signify a desire of ac- tion. They are formed from the last supine by adding rio. They are all of the fourth conjugation, and generally want both preterite and supine; as, Conaturio, I desire to sup; Esurio, I am hungry, or I desire to eat. 9. Lastly, In construction, verbs receive names from their more particular signification; as, vocative verbs, or verbs of naming, verbs of remembering, of want, of teaching, of accu- sing, &c. In the preceding division of verbs, with respect to their signification, I have receded a little from the common method; and in particular I have given a different account of neuter verbs from that commonly re- ceived by grammarians, who comprise under them all intransitive verbs, though their significations be ever so much active. But this I did partly from the reason of the name, which imports a negation both of action and passion, and partly to give a distinct view of the significations of verbs, without regard to their terminations, which in that respect are purely accidental and arbitrary. I have also excluded from the divisions of verbs those called neutral passives [Lat. neutra passiva] because originally they are active verbs; for the primary signification of vapulo is pered or ploro; of exulo, extra solum eo; of veneo, venum eo; of nubo, velo. Licco indeed is a very singular verb, for in the active voice it signifies passively, and in the passive, actively. PARS TERTIA. DE SENTENTIIS, SIVE ORA- TIONE. SENTENTIA est quævis animi cogitatio, duabus aut plu- ribus vocibus simul junctis enun- ciata: ut, Tu legis; Tu legis li- bros; Tu legis libros bonos; Tu legis libros bonos domi (a). PART THIRD. OF SENTENCES, OR SPEECH. A SENTENCE is any thought of the mind expressed by two or more words put together: as, You read books; You read good books; You read good books at home. (a) We have now arrived at the principal part of grammar; for the great end of speech being to convey our thoughts unto others, it will be of little use to us to have a stock of words, and to know what changes PART III. CHAP I. OF CONSTRUCTION. 89 CAP. I. CHAP. I. DE SYNTAXI, VEL CONSTRUC- TIONE. SYNTAXIS est recta vocum in oratione compositio. Ejus partes sunt duæ, concor- dantia et regimen (b). Concordantia est quando una dictio concordat cum altera in quibusdam accidentibus. Regimen est quando dictio regit certum casum. 1. DE CONCORDANTIA. CONCORDANTIA est qua- druplex. VO. 1. Adjectivi cum substanti- 2. Verbi cum nominativo. 3. Relativi cum antecedente. 4. Substantivi cum substan- tivo. OF SYNTAX, OR CONSTRUC- TION. SYNTAX is the right order. ing of words in speech. Its parts are two, concord and government. Concord is when one word agrees with another in some ac- cidents. Government is when a word governs a certain case. I. OF CONCORD. CONCORD is fourfold. 1. Of an adjective with a sub- stantive. 2. Of a verb with a nomina- tive. 3. Of a relative with an an- tecedent. 4. Of a substantive with substantive. can be made upon them, unless we can also apply them to practice,´ and make them answer the great purposes for which they are intended. To the attainment of this end there are two things absolutely necessary, viz. I.That in speech we dispose and frame our words, according to the laws and rules established among those whose language we speak. II. That in like manner we know what is spoken or written, and be able to explain it in due order, and resolve it into the several parts of which it is made up. The first of these is called syntax or construction, and the second is na- med exposition or resolution. The first shows us how to speak the language. ourselves; and the second how to understand it when spoken by others. -But it must be owned, that there is such a necessary connection be- tween them, that he who is master of the first cannot be ignorant of the second. (b) NOTE 1. That the difference between concord and government con- sists chiefly in this-that in concord there can no change be made in the accidents, that is, gender, case, number or person of the one, but the like change must also be made in the other: But in government, the first H.2 90 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. REGULA I. 1 ADJECTIVUM concordat cum substantivo in genere, numero et casu; ut, * Vir + bonus. *Foemina † casta. * † Dulce pomum. REG. II. 2 VERBUM concordat cum nominativo ante se in numero et persona; ut, Ego + lego. * Tu † scribis. *Præceptor † docet. RULE I. AN adjective agrees with a substantive in gender, number and case; as, A good man. A chaste woman. A sweet apple. RULE II. A VERB agrees with the no- minative before it in number and person; as, I read. You write. The master teacheth. ANNOTATIONES. 3 1. VERBA substantiva, vo- candi et gestus habent utrin- que nominativum ad eandum rem pertinentem; ut, 1. SUBSTANTIVE verbs, verbs of naming and gesture have a nominative both before and after them, belonging to the same thing; as, word (if declinable) may be changed, without any change in the second. In concord, the first word may be called the word directing, and the se- cond the word directed: In government the first is called the word governing, and the second the word governed NOTE 2. That for the greater ease both of master and scholar, we have noted those words wherein the force of each example lieth, with the marks (*) and (†); the word directing or governing with (*), and the word directed or governed with (†); or where there are two words di- recting or governing, the first with (*), and the second with (**); and where two words directed or governed, the first with (†) and the second with (H). Number 1. NOTE 1. That the way to find out the substantive is to ask the question who or what? to the adjective; for that which answers to it is the substantive. And the same question put to the verb or relative, discovers the nominative or antecedent. NOTE 2. That another adjective sometimes supplies the place of a sub- stantive; as, Amicus certus, a sure friend; Bona ferina, good venison. Homo being understood to amicus, and caro to ferina. NOTE 3. That the substantive thing [negotium] is most frequently un- derstood; and then the adjective is always put in the neuter gender, as if it were a substantive; as, triste, [supple negotium] i. e. Rcs tristis, a sad thing. Bona, [supple negotia] i. e. Res bone, good things. Num. 2. NOTE, That the infinitive mood frequently supplies the place of the nominative; as, Mentiri non est meum, To lie is not mine, [or my property.] Num. 3. 1. Substantive verbs are Sum, fio, forem and existo. FART. III. CHAP. I. OF CONSTRUCTION. 91 + Ego sum †† discipulus. † Tu* vocaris tt Joannes. Illa * incedit †† Regīna. 2. ¶ EXCEP. Infinitivus mo- dus accusativum ante se habet; ut, * Gaudeo † te valēre. 3. ¶ Esse habet eundem ca- sum post se quem ante se; ut, + Petrus cupit * esse tt vir doctus. Scio † Petrum * esse tt vi- rum doctum. † Mihi †† negligenti * esse non licet. I am a scholar. You are named John. She walks [as] a queen. 2. ¶ EXCEP. The infini- 4 tive mood has an accusative before it; as, I am glad that you are well. 3. Esse hath the same 5 case after it that it hath be- fore it; as, Peter desires to be a learn- ed man. I know that Peter is a learned man. I am not allowed to be ne- gligent. 2. Verbs of naming are these passives, appellor, dicor, vocor, nominer, nuncupor; to which add, videor, existimor, creor, constituor, salutor, de- signor, &c. 3. Verbs of gesture are, co, incedo, venio, cubo, sto, sedeo, evado, fu- gio, dormio, somnio, maneo, &c. NOTE, That any verb may have after it the nominative, when it belongs to the same thing with the nominative before it; as, Audivi hoc puer, I heard it being, (or when I was) a boy. Defendi rempublicam adolescens, non deseram senex, I defended the commonwealth (when I was) a young man, I will not desert it (now that I am) old, Cic. Num. 4. NOTE, That when the particle that (in Lat. quod or ut) comes between two verbs, it is elegantly left out, by turning the nominative ease into the accusative, and the verb into the infinitive mood; as, Aiunt regem adventare, They say (that) the king is coming; rather than, Aiunt quod rex adventat. Turpe est eos, qui bene nåti sunt, turpiter vivere, "Tis a shameful thing that they who are well born should live basely; rather than, Ut ii turpiter vivant. See p. 53. Num. 5. NOTE, 1. That we frequently say, Licet nobis esse bonos; We may be good. Tibi expedit esse sedulum, 'Tis expedient for you to be diligent. Nemini unquam nocuit fuisse pium, It never hurted any man that he hath been pious: But then the accusative, nos, te illum, &c. is understood; thus Licet nobis esse bonos, &c. NOTE, 2. That if esse, and the other infinitives of substantive verbs, verbs of naming &c. have no accusative or dative before them, the word that follows (whether substantive or adjective) is to be put in the nomi- native; as, Dicitur esse vir, He is said to be a man. Non videtur esse facturus, He seems not about to do it. Nemo debet dici beatus ante suum abitum, No man should be called happy before his death. 92 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. 6 REG. III. * RELATIVUM qui quæ quod, concordat cum antece- dente in genere et numero: ut, *Vir sapit † qui pauca lo- quitur. 7-1. Si nullus interviniat no- minativus inter relativum et verbum, relativum erit ver- bo nominativus; ut, Præceptor * qui † docet. 8 2. At si interveniat nomi- nativus inter relativum et verbum, relativum erit ejus casus quem verbum aut no- men sequens, vel præposi- tio præcedens regere solent; ut, * Deus † quem colimus. † Cujus *munĕre vivĭmus. † Cui nullus est similis. * A † quo facta sunt omnia. * RULE III. THE relative, qui, quæ, quod, agrees with the antecedent in gender and number; as, He is a wise man who speaks little. 1. If no nominative come be- tween the relative and the verb, the relative shall be the nomi- native to the verb; as, The master who teacheth. 2. But if a nominative come between the relative and the verb, the relative shall be of that case, which the verb or noun following, or the prepo- sition going before use to go- vern; as, God whom we worship. By whose gift we live. To whom there is none like. By whom all things were made. ANNOTATIO. 9.¶ Duo vel plura substantiva, ¶ Two or more substantives singularia, conjunctione (et, singular coupled together with Num. 6. Note, 1. That the antecedent is a substantive noun that goes before the relative, and is again understood to the relative.-Wherefore it will not be amiss to teach the scholar to supply it every where; thus, Beware of idleness, which (idleness) is an enemy to virtuc, Cave segni- tiem, quæ (segnities) est inimica virtuti. Nay Cicero himself, but espe- cially Cæsar, frequently repeats the substantive; as, In oppidem perfu- gisti, quo in oppido, &c. You fled to a town, in which town, Cic. Diem dicunt, quo die ad ripam Rhodani conveniant, They appoint a day, on which day they should meet upon the bank of the river Rhone, Cæs. NOTE, 2. That when the relative respects a whole sentence, it is put in the neuter gender; as, Joannes mortuus est, quod mihi summo dolori est, John is dead, which is a great grief to me. NOTE, 3. That the person of the relative is always the same with that of its antecedent; as, Ego qui deceo, I who teach. Tu qui discis, You who learn. Lectio que docetur, the lesson which is taught. Num. 9. NOTE 1. That when the substantives are of different genders, and signify persons, the adjective or relative plural must agree with the PART III. CHAP I. OF CONSTRUCTION. 93 ac, atque, &c.) copulata, ha- bent adjectivum, verbum vel relativum plurale; ut, *Petrus et Joannes † qui † sunt + docti. REG. IV. UNUM Substantivum con- cordat cum alio, eandem rem significante, in casu ; ut, *Cicero † Orātor. * Urbs + Edinburgum. * Filius † deliciæ matris suæ (a). t a conjunction (et, ac, atque, &c.) have a verb, adjective, or relative plural; as, Peter and John who are learned. RULE IV. ONE substantive agrees 10 with another, signifying the same thing, in case; as, Cicero the Orator. The city of Edinburgh. A son the darling of his Mother. masculine rather than the feminine; as, Pater ct mater qui sunt mortus, The father and mother who are dead. EXCEP. But if the substantives, or any of them, signify things without life, the adjective, or relative plural, must be put in the neuter gender: as, Divitie, decus, gloria in oculis sita sunt, Riches honour and glory are set before your eyes. NOTE 2. That when two or more nominatives are of different persons, the verb plural must agree with the first person rather than the second, and the second rather than the third; as, Si tu et Tullia valetis, ego et Cicero valemus, If you and Tullia are well, I and Cicero are well. NOTE 3. That the adjective or verb frequently agree with the substan- tive or nominative that is nearest them, and are understood to the rest; as, Et ego in culpa sum et tu, Both I and you are in the fault; Or, Et ego et tu es in culpa. Nihil hic deest nisi carmina, There is nothing here wanting but charms: Or, Nihil hic nisi carmina desunt. This manner of construction is most usual, when the different words signify one and the same thing, or much to the same purpose; as, Mens, ratio et consilium in senibus est, Understanding, reason and prudence, is in old men. NOTE 4. That collective nouns, because they are equivalent to a plu ral number, have sometimes the adjective or verb in the plural number as, Pars virgis casi, A part of them were scourged. Turba ruunt, The crowd rush. (a) To these four concords some add a fifth, viz. That of the respon- sive, agreeing with its interrogative in case; as, Quis dedit tibi pecuniam ? Pater. Who gave you money? My father. Quo cares? Libro.´ What de you want? A book. But this ought not to be made a principal rule; For the responsive, or the word that answers the question, does not depend upon the interrogative, but upon the verb or some other word joined with it; which, because spoken immediately before, is generally understood in the answer; thus, Quis dedit tibi pecuniam? Pater (dedit mihi pecuni am) Quo cares? (Careo) iibro. } 94 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. II. DE REGIMINE. REGIMEN est triplex, 1. Nominum. 2. Verborum. 3. Vocum indeclinabilium. I. Regimen Nominum. § 1. SUBSTANTIVORUM. REG. I. 11 UNUM substantivum regit aliud, rem diversam signifi- cans, in genitivo; ut, * Amor + Dei. * Lex † naturæ. II. OF GOVERNMENT. GOVERNMENT is three- fold. 1. Of nouns. 2. Of verbs. 3. Of words indeclinable. I. The government of Nouns. § 1. OF SUBSTANTIVES. RULE I. ONE substantive governs another, signifying a different thing in the genitive; as, The love of God. The law of nature. ANNOTATIONES. 12 1. Si posterius substanti- vum adjunctum habeat adjec- tivum laudis vel vituperii, in genitivo vel ablativo poni potest; ut, * Virt summæ † prudentiæ, vel + summa + prudentia. * Puer † probe † indõlis, vel † proba + indole. 13 2. Adjectivum in neutro genere, absque substantivo, regit genitivum; ut, *Multum † pecuniæ. + * Quid † rei 1. If the last substantive have an adjective of praise or dis- praise joined with it, it may be put in the genitive or ablative; as, A man of great wisdom. A boy of a good disposition. 2. An adjective in the neuter gender, without a substantive, governs the genitive; as, Much money. What is the matter? Num. 11. NOTE 1. That of or 's is the ordinary sign of this genitive. NOTE 2. That the relative pronouns, ejus, illius, cujus, &c. Englished, his, her, its, their, thereof, whereof, whose, have their substantives generally understood; as, Liber ejus, (supple hominis, fæminæ, &c.) His book or her book. Libri eorum (supple hominum fœminarum, &c.) Their books. Num. 13. This is more elegant than Multa pecunia; Quæ res ? NOTE 1. That those adjectives which thus govern the genitive, as if they were substantives, are generally such as signify quantity; as, mul tum, tantum, quantum, plus, plurimum, PART III. CHAP I. OF CONSTRUCTION. 95 § 2. ADJECTIVorum. REG. I. ‡ ADJECTIVA verbalia vel affectionem animi significantia genitivum postulant; ut, * Avidus † gloriæ. * Ignārus † fraudis. * Memor + beneficiorem. REG. II. * PARTITIVA et partitive posita, comparativa, superla- tiva, interrogativa et quaedam numeralia genitivo plurali gau- dent; ut, * Aliquis † philosophorum. * Senior † fratrum. * Doctissimus † Romanorum. * Quis † nostrum. * Una † musarum. * Octavus † sapientum. § 2. OF ADJECTIVES. RULE I. VERBAL adjectives, or 14 such as signify an affection of the mind, require the geni- tive; as, Desirous of glory. Ignorant of fraud. Mindful of favours. RULE II. PARTITIVES and words 15 placed partitively, compara- tives, superlatives, interroga- tives and some numerals go- vern the genitive plural; as, Some one of the philosophers. The elder of the brothers. The most learned of the Romans. Which of us? One of the muses. The eighth of the wise men. NOTE 2. That plus and quid always govern the genitive, and upon that account are by many thought real substantives. Num. 14. To this rule belong, 1. Adjectives of desire; as, cupidus, ambitiosus, avarus, studiosus, curiosus. 2. Of knowledge; as, peritus, gnarus, prudens, callidus, providus, doctus, docilis, præscius, præsagus, certus, memor, eruditus, expertus, consultus. &c. 3. Of ignorance; as, ignarus, rudis, imperitus, nescius, inscius, in- certus, dubius, anxius, sollicitus, immemor. 4. Of guilt; as, conscius, convictus, manifestus, suspectus, reus. 5. Verbals in ax and ns; as, edax, capax, ferax, fugax, tenax, per- vicax And amans, cupiens, appetens, patiens, fugiens, sitiens, neli- gens, &c. 6. To which may be referred, æmulus, munificus, parcus, prodigus, profusus, securus. Num. 15. NOTE 1. That it is easy to know when this rule takes place, by resolving the genitive into inter with the accus. or de, e, ex, with the abl. as, Optimus regum, The best of kings, i. e. Optimus inter reges, or de, e, ex, regibus. NOTE 2. That when there are two substantives of different genders, the partitive, &c. rather agrees with the first than the last; as, Indus 96 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. REG. III. 16 ADJECTIVA significantia RULE III. ADJECTIVES signifying pro- commodum vel incommodum, fit or disprofit, likeness or un- similitudinem vel dissimilitu- dinem, regunt dativum ; ut, * Utilis + bello. * Perniciosus † reipublicæ. *Similis † patri. - 17 ¶ Verbalia in bilis et dus re- gunt dativum ; ut, *Amandus vel * amabilis † omnibus. REG. IV. 18* ADJECTIVA dimensio- likeness, govern the dative; as, to the common- Profitable for war. Pernicious wealth. Like his father. Verbals in bilis and dus go- To be loved of all men. vern the dative; as, RULE IV. ADJECTIVES signifying di- nem significantia regunt ac-mension govern the accusative cusativum mensuræ; ut, Columna sexaginta † pedes *alta. of measure; as, A pillar sixty feet high. Aluminum maximus, Cic. Leo animalium fortissimus, Plin. Otherwise it is of the same gender with the substantive it governs; às, Pauca ani- malium, Unaquæque fœminarum. NOTE 3. That partitives, &c. take the genitive singular of collective nouns, and do not necessarily agree with them in gender, as, Præstan- tissimus nostræ civitatis, Cic. Nympharum sanguinis una,' Virg. Num. 16. NOTE 1. That some of these adjectives govern also the gen. as, amicus, inimicus, socius, vicinus, par, æqualis, similis, dissimilis, pro- prius, communis, &c. NOTE 2. That adject. signifying motion or tendency to a thing, choose rather the accus. with ad, than the dat. such as, proclivis, pronus, pro- pensus, velox, celer, tardus, piger, &c. as, Est piger ad pœnas princeps, ad præmia velox, Ovid. NOTE 3. That adject. signifying fitness or the contrary, may have either of them; as, aptus, ineptus, bello, or ad bellum. Num. 17. Of or by is the ordinary sign of this dative. NOTE. That participles of the preter tense, and pas. verbs also, espe- cially among the poets, have frequently the dat. instead of the abl. with aor ab; as, Nullus eorum mihi visus est, None of them was seen by me; Non audior ulli, I am not heard by any. Num. 18. The adject. of dimension are, altus, high or deep; crassus or densus, thick; latus, broad; longus, long; profundus, deep. The names of measure are, digitus, an inch; palmus, an hand-breadth; pes, a foot; cubitus, a cubit; ulna, an ell; passes, a pace, &c. PART III. CHAP. I. OF CONSTRUCTION. 97 REG. V. *Comparativus regit ablati- vum qui resolvitur per quam; ut, * Dulcior † melle. * Præstantior † auro. REG. VI. Hæc adjectiva, dignus, in- dignus, contentus, præditus, captus et fretus: Item natus, sa- tus, ortus, editus, et similia, ab- lativum petunt; ut, * Dignus † honore. *Præditus † virtute. * Contentus † parvo. * Captus † oculis. * Fretus † viribus. * Ortus † regibus. REG. VII. Adjectivum copiæ aut inopiæ regit genitivum vel Ablativum; at, *Plenus + iræ vel tira. * Inops † rationis. RULE V. The comparative degree 19 governs the ablative, which is resolved by quam; as, Sweeter than honey. Better than gold. RULE VI. These adjectives, dignus, 20 indignus, contentus, prædi- tus, captus, and fretus: also natus, satus, ortus, editus, and the like, require the ablative; as, Worthy of honour. Endued with virtue. Content with little. Blind. Trusting to his strength. Descended of Kings, RULE VII. An adjective of plenty or 21 want governs the genitive or ablative; as, Full of anger. Void of reason. NOTE 1. That verbs signifying dimension likewise have the Acc. of measure; as, Patet tres ulnas, It is three ells large, Virg. NOTE 2. That sometimes the word of Measure is put in the Abl. as, Fossa sex cubitis alta, duodecim lata, Liv. Venter ejus extat sesquipede, And sometimes, but rarely, in the gen. as, Ñec longiores duode- Pers. num pedum, Plin. Num. 19. Let the following examples be observed and imitated : Multo, melior, much better. Nihilo pejor, Nothing worse. Major solito, great- er than usual. Quo diligentior es, eo doctior evades, The more diligent you are, the more learned you will become. Quanto superbior, tanto vi- lior, The prouder the less worth. Nihil Virgilio doctius, There is none more learned than Virgil. Num. 21. NOTE, 1. That distensus gravidus, refertus; and orbus, vacuus, viduus, choose rather the ablative: Indigus, compos and impos the genitive. NOTE, 2. That some comprehend Opus and usus, when they signify necessity, under this rule; as, Quid opus est verbis? What need is there of words? Ovid. Nunc viribus usus, Now there is need of strength, Virg. But it is to be remarked that these are substantive nouns, the I 98 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. II. Regimen Verborum. § 1. PERSONALIUM. REG. I. 22 SUM quoties possessio- nem, proprietatem aut offici- um significat, regit geniti- vum; ut, * *Est + regis punire rebelles. ↑ Insipientis est dicere, non putâram. + Militum * est suo est suo duci pa- rêre. 23 ¶ Excipiuntur hi nominati- vi, meum, tuum, suum, nos- trum, vestrum ; ut, † Tuum * est id procurare. REG. II. 24 * MISEREOR, miseresco et 'satago regunt genitivum; ut, *Miserere † civium tuorum. * Satăgit + rerum suarum. REG. III. 25 EST pro habeo regit dativum persona; ut, *Est † mihi liber. * Sunt † mihi libri. II. The government of Verbs. § 1. OF PERSONAL VERBS. RULE I. SUM, when it signifies pos- session, property or duty, go- verns the genitive; as, It belongs to the king to pun- ish rebels. It is the property of a fool to say, I had not thought. It is the duty of soldiers to obey their general. ¶ These nominatives meum, tuum, suum, nostrum, vestrum, are excepted; as, It is your duty to manage that. RULE II. MISEREOR, miseresco and satago govern the genitive; as, Take pity on your countrymen. He hath his hands full at home. RULE III. EST taken for habeo (to 25 have) governs the dative of a person; as, I have a book. I have books. very same with opus, operis, a work, and usus, usus, use; and have the ablative after them, because of the preposition in, which is under- stood. Sometimes opus is an adjective indeclinable; as, Dux nobis opus est, We stand in need of a leader. It is elegantly joined with the parti- ciple perfect; as, Cunsulto, maturato, invento, facto, &c. opus est, We must advise, make haste, find out, do, &c. Num. 23. To these last may be added possessive nouns, such as, Re- gium, humanum, belluinum, and the like; as, Humanum est errare, It is incident to mail to err. NOTE, That to all these is understood Officium, opus negotium, or some other word to be gathered from the sentence; as Me Pompeii totum esse scis, You know that I am wholly Pompey's, or in Pompey's interest, Cic. i. e. amicum, fautorem, or the like. Num. 25 This is more elegant than Habco librum, or habeo libros. PART. III. CHAP. 3. OF CONSTRUCTION. 99 1 REG. IV. SUM pro affero regit duos dativos, unum persona, alte- rum rei; ut, * Est mihi † voluptati. REG. V. VERBUM significans com- modum vel incommodum regit dativum; ut, * Fortuna favet † fortibus. + Nemini † noceas. RULE IV. SUM taken for affèro (to 26 bring) governs two datives, the one of a person, and the other of a thing; as, It is (brings) a pleasure to me. RULE V. A VERB signifying advan-27 tage or disadvantage governs the dative; as, Fortune favours the brave. Do hurt to no man. So desum is used elegantly for careo; as, Desunt mihi libri, for Careo libris, I want books. Num. 26. NOTE, That other verbs, such as, Do, duco, verto, tribuo, habeo, relinquo, &c. may have two datives; as, Hoc tibi laudi datur, Youj are praised for this. Ne mihi vitio vertas, Do not blame me. To this may be referred such expressions as these, Est mihi nomen Joanni, My name is John; which is more elegant than Est mihi nomen Joannes or Jounnis. Num. 27, This is a very general rule, and (when we signify a thing to be acquired to any person or thing) almost common to all verbs. But in a more particular manner are comprehended under it. Verbs signifying 1. To profit or hurt; as, Commodo, proficio, placeo, consulo ; nocco, officio. But ledo and offendo govern the Accus. 2. To favour, to help, and their contraries; as, Faveo, annuo, ar- rideo, assentior, adstipulor, gratulor, ignosco, indulgeo, parco, adulor, plaudo, blandior, lenocinor, palpor, studeo, supplico, &c. Also Auxilior, adminiculor, subvenio, succurro, patrocinor, me- deor: Also Derogo, detraho, invideo, &c. But Juvo has the Accus. 3. To command, obey or resist; as, Impero, præcipio, mando : Pareo, servio, obedio, obsequor, obtempero, moremgero, morigeror, famulor: Pugno, repugno, certo, obsto, reluctor, renitor, resisto, adversor, refragor, &c. But Jubeo governs the Accus. 4. To threaten or be angry with; as, Minor, indignor, irascor, succenseo. 5. To trust ; as, Fido, confido, credo. 6. Verbs compounded with satis, bene and male; as, Satisfacio, bene‹ facio, benedico, malefacio, maledico. 7. Sum with its compounds, except possum. 8. Verbs compounded with these ten prepositions, Ad, ante, con, in, inter, ob, post, præ, sub and super as, 1. Adsto, accumbo, acquiesco, assideo, adhæreo, admovco. 2. Antecello, anteeo, anteverto. 3. Conso no, commisceo, condono, commorior. 4. Illudo, immorior, inhæreo, in- sideo, inlio, innitor, invigilo, incumbo. 5. Interpono, intervenio, inter- sero. 6. Obrepo, obtrecto, occumbo. 7. Posipono, posthabeo. 8. Præ- 100 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. : REG. VI. 28 VERBUM active significans regit accusativum; ut, * Ama + Deum. * Reverêre † parentes. 29 Recordor, memini, reminis- cor et obliviscor regunt accu- sativum vel genitivum ; ut, *Recordor † lectionis vel † lec- tionem. *Obliviscor + injuriæ vel † in- juriam. VERBA activa alium una cum accusativo casum re- gentia. 30 § 1. VERBA accusandi, dam- nandi et absolvendi, cum ac- cusativo personæ, regunt etiam genitivum criminis; ut, *Arguit† me t† furti. † Meipsum †† inertiæ * demno. con- + Illum tt homicidii* absol- vunt. RULE. VI. A VERB signifying actively governs the accusative; as, Love God. Reverence your parents. Recordor, memini, reminis- cor and obliviscor govern the acc. or gen. as, I remember my lesson. I forgot an injury. ACTIVE verbs governing another case together with the accusative. 1. VERBS of accusing, con- demning and acquitting, with the accusative of the person, govern also the genitive of the crime; as, He accuses me of theft. I condemn myself of lazi- ness. They acquit him of man- slaughter. eo, præstat for excellit, præluceo. 9. Succedo, submitto, subjicio. 10. Supersto, supervenio. NOTE. 1. That to, the sign of the dative, is frequently understood. NOTE, 2. That to is not always a sign of the dative, for 1. Verbs of local motion; as, Eo, venio, proficiscor: And 2. these verbs, Provoco, voco, invito, hortor, specto, pertineo, attineo, and such like, have the ac- cusative with the preposition ad. Num. 28. NOTE, That neuter and intransitive verbs have sometimes an accusative after them. 1. Of their own or the like signification; as, Vi- vere vitam, gaudere gaudium, sitire sanguinem, olere hircum. 2. When taken in a metaphorical sense; as, Ardebat Alexin, i. e. Vehementer ama- bat. Num. 30. 1. Verbs of accusing are, Accuso, ago, appello, arcesso, ar- guo, alligo, astringo, defero, incuso, insimulo, postulo, &c. 2. Verbs of condemning are, Damno, condemno, convinco, &c. 3. Verbs of absolving are Solvo, absolvo, libero, purgo, &c. NOTE, 1. That the genitive may be changed into the ablative, either with or without a preposition; as, Purgo te hac culpa, or de hac culpa, I clear you of this fault. Eum de vi condemnavit, He found him guilty of a riot, Cic. PART III. CHAP. I. OF CONSTRUCTION. 101 2. Verba comparandi, dan- 2. VERBS of comparing, 31 di, narrandi et auferendi, re-giving, declaring and taking gunt accusativum cum dativo; away, govern the accusative with the dative; as, ut, * Compăro † Virgilium †† Ho- mēro. + Suum ++ cuique * tribuito. *Nárras † fabulam †† surdo. *Eripuit + me t† morti. §3. VERBA rogandi et do- cendi duos admittunt accusati- I compare Virgil to Homer. Give every man his own. You tell a story to a deaf man. He rescued me from death. 3. VERBS of asking and 32+ teaching admit of two accu- vos, priorem persona, posteri-satives, the first of a person, orem rei; ut, * Posce † Deum †† veniam. *Docuit † me t† grammati cam. and the second of a thing; as, Beg pardon of God, He taught me grammar. ANNOTATIO. § Quorum activa duos casus regunt, eorum passiva posteri- orem retinent; ut. The passives of such active 33 verbs as govern two cases, do still retain the last of them; as, NOTE, 2. That the genitive, properly speaking, is governed by some ablative understood, such as, Crimine, pæna, actione, causa; as, accu sare furti, i. e. Crimine furti. Condemnare capitis, i. e. pæna capitis. NOTE, 3. That Crimine, pæna, actione, capite morte, scarcely admit of a preposition. Num. 31. 1. To verbs of comparing belong also verbs of preferring or postponing. 2. To verbs of giving belong verbs of receiving, promising, paying, sending, bringing. 3. To verbs of declaring belong verbs of explaining, shewing, deny- ing, &c. 4. Verbs of taking away are Aufero, adimo, eripio, eximo, demo, surri- pio, detraho, tollo, excutio, extorqueo, arceo, defendo, &c. NOTE, 1. That many of these verbs govern the dative by Núm. 27. NOTE, 2. That innumerable other verbs may have the accusative with the dative, when together with the thing done is also signified the person. or thing to, or for whom it is done; as, Doce mihi filium, Teach me my son; Cura mihi hanc rem, Take care of this affair for me. NOTE 3. That Comparo, confero, compono, have frequently the ablativé with cum. Num. 32, NOTE, 1. That among the verbs that govern two accusatives, are also reckoned the following: L.2 102 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. * Accusor † furti. Virgilius comparatur † Ho- mēro. * * Doceor † grammaticam. REG. VII. 34 § PRETIUM rei a quovis verbo in ablativo regitur; ut, *Emi librum † duobus assibus. *Vendĭdit hic + auro patriam. Demosthenes * docuit + tálen- to. 35 Excipiuntur hi genitivi, Tanti, quanti, pluris, mino- ris; ut, † Quanti* constitit ? Asse ett pluris. 36 * VERBA æstimandi regunt hujusmodi genitivos, Magni, parvi, nihili, &c. ut, * Estimo te † magni. I am accused of theft. Virgil is compared to Ho- mer. I am taught grammar. RULE VII. THE price of a thing is go- verned in the abl. by any verb; as, I bought a book for two shil- lings. This man sold his country for gold. Demosthenes taught for a ta- lent. These gen. Tanti, quanti, pluris, minoris, are excepted; as, How much cost it ? A shilling and more. VERBS of valuing govern such gen. as these, Magni, parvi, nihili, &c. as, I value you much. 1. Celo; as, Cela hanc rem uxorem, Conceal this from your wife, Plaut. But we can say also, Celo te de hac re, and Celo tibi hanc rem. 2. Verbs of clothing; as, Induit se calceos, He put on his shoes. But these have more commonly the ablative of the thing without a preposi- tion; as Vestit se purpura, He clothes himself with purple. Induo and exuo have frequently the person in the dative, and the thing in the ac- cus. as, Thoracem sibi induit, He put on his breast-plate. 3. Moneo, as, Id unum te moneo, I put you in mind of this one thing./ But, unless it is some general word, (as, Hoc, illud, id, &c.) Moneo, admoneo, commonefacio, have either the genitive, as, Admoneo, te officii, I put you in mind of your duty; Or the abl. with de; as, De hac re te sæpius admonui, I have frequently warned you of this. NOTE, 2. That verbs of asking often change the accusative of the per- son into an ablative with the preposition; as, Oro, exoro, peto, postulo hoc a te; I entreat this of you: Some always, as, Contendo, quæro, sci- tor, sciscitor hoc a te. Finally, some have the accusative of the person, and the ablative of the thing with de; as, Interro, consulò, percontor te de hac re. Num. 35. NOTE. That if the substantive be expressed, they are put in the ablative; as, Quanto pretio ? Minore mercede. Num. 36. 1. Verbs of valuing are Estimo, pendo, facio, habeo, duco, puto, tuxo.. BARF III. CHAP. I. OF CONSTRUCTION. 103 REG. VIII. VERBA copiæ et inopiæ plerumque ablativum regunt; ut, *Abundatt divitiis. *Caret omni † culpa. Utor, abutor, fruor, fun- RULE VIII. VERBS of plenty and 374. scarceness for the most part govern the abl. as, He abounds in riches. He has no fault. Utor, abutor fruor, fun- 38"*. gor, potior, vescor, regunt ab-gor, potior, vescor, govern lativum; ut, * Utitur + fraude. t * Abutitor + libris. $2. REGIMEN VERBORUM IM- PERSONALIUM. REG. IX. VERBUM impersonale re- git dativum; ut, * Expedit † reipublicæ. * Licet + nemini peccare. EXCEP. 1. Refert et inte- rest genitivum postulant; ut, * Refert + patris. * Interest + omnium. the abl. as, He uses deceit. He abuses books. § 2. THE GOVERNMENT OF IMPERSONAL VERBS. RULE IX. AN impersonal verb gov- 39 erns the dat. as, It is profitable for the state. No man is allowed to sin. EXCEP. 1. Refert and in-40 tèrest require the gen. as, It concerns my father. It is the interest of all. 2. The rest of the genitives are, Minoris, minimi, tanti, quanti, pluris, majoris, plurimi, maximi, nauci, flocci, pili, assis, teruncii, hujus: Also Equi and boni after facio and consulo. NOTE, 1. That we say also Estimo, magno, parvo, supple pretio. NOTE, 2. That Alvarus excludes majoris, as wanting authority. But there is an example of it to be found in Phædrus, II. 5. 25. Multo majoris alapæ mecum veneunt. Num. 37. Sometimes they have the gen. as, Eget aris, He wants mo- ney, Hor. Implentur veteris Bacchi, They are filled with old wine, Virg. NOTE, That verbs of loading and unloading, and the like, belong to this rule; as, Navis oneratur mercibus, The ship is loaded with goods. Levabo to hoc onere, I will ease you of this burden. Liberavit nos metu, He delivered us from fear. Num. 38. To these verbs add, Nitor, gaudeo, muto, dono, munero, communico, victito, beo, fido, impertior, dignor, nascor, creor, afficio, con- sto, prosequor, &c. NOTE, That potior sometimes governs the gen. as, Potiri hostium, To get his enemies into his power. Potiri rerum, To have the chief rule. Num. 39. Such as these Accidit, contingit, evenit, conducit, expedit, lu- bet, libet, licet, placet, displicet, vacat, restat, præstat, liquet, nocet, do 104 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. 41 ‡ At mea, tua, sua, nostra. vestra, ponuntur in accusativo plurali: ut, Non † mea* refert. 42 EXCEP. 2. Hæc quinque, Miseret, pœnitet, pudet, tædet, et piget, regunt accusativum personæ, cum Genitivo rei: ut, * Miseret † me †† tui. *Pænitet† me tt peccati. * Tædet † me tt vitæ. 43 EXCEP. 3. Hæc quatuor, Decet, delectat, juvat, oportet, regunt accusativum personæ cum infinitivo: ut, * Delectat + me t† studēre. Non* decet † te †† rixari. But mea, tua, sua, nostra, vestra, are put in the Acc. plural: as, I am not concerned. EXCEP. 2. These five, Mi- seret, pœnitet, pudet, tædet, and piget, govern the Acc. of a person, with the Gen. of a Thing; as, I pity you. I repent of my sin. I am weary of my life. EXCEP. 3. These four, Decet, delectat, juvat, opor- tet, govern the Acc. of the person with the Infin. as, I delight to study. It does not become you to scold. §3. REGIMEN infinitivi, Par-§ 3. The Government of the ticipiorum, gerundiorum et infinitive, Participles, ge- runds and supines. supinorum. REG. X. 44 UNUM Verbum regit aliud 45 in infinitivo: ut, * Cupio † discere. REG. XI. PARTICIPIA, gerundia, et su- pina, regunt casum suorum ver- borum : ut, *Amans † virtutem. *Carens + fraude. RULE X. ONE verb governs another in the infin. as, I desire to learn. RULE XI. PARTICIPLES, gerunds, and supines, govern the case of their own verbs; as, Loving virtue. Wanting guile. let, sufficit, &c. Together with the dat. they have commonly an infin. after them, which is supposed to supply the place of a nom. before them. Num. 42, Note. That this Gen. is frequently turned into the Infin. as, Panitet me peccâsse; Tædet me vivere; and so they fall in with the fol- lowing rule. Num. 43, NOTE. That Oportet is elegantly joined with the Subj. mood, ut being understood; as, Oportet fucias, (you must do it) for oportet te facere. Attinet, Pertinet and Spectat, when used impersonally (which rarely happens) have the Acc. with ad, as was observed above, p, 103. Num 44. Sometimes it is governed by Adj. as, Cupidus et cupiens discere. PART III. CHAP. I. OF CONSTRUCTION. 105 1. GERUNDIA. 1. GERUNDIUM in dum nom- inativi casus cum verbo [est] regit dativum: ut, ✔ *Vivendum est † mihi recte. *Moriendum est omnibus. 2. Gerundium in di regitur à Substantivis vel adjectivis : ut, *Tempus † legendi. *Cupidus discendi. 3. Gerundium in do dativi Casus regitur ab adjectivis utilitatem vel aptitudinem significantibus; ut, * * Charta utilis † scribendo. 4. Gerundium in dum Accu- sativi casus regitur a præposi- tionibus ad vel inter; ut, Promptus ad † audiendum. t Attentus* inter† docendum. 5. Gerundium in do, Ablativi Casus regitur a Prepositioni- bus, a, ab, de, e, ex, vel in ; ut, Pœna* a † peccando absterret. 1 GERUNDS. 1. THE gerund in dum of the 46 Nominative case, with the verb [est] governs the dative; as, I must live well. All must die. 2. The Gerund in di is go- 47 verned by substantives or adjec tives; as, Time of reading. Desirous to learn. 3. The gerund in do of the 48 dative case is governed by ad- jectives signifying usefulness or fitness; as, Paper useful for writing. 4. The gerund in dum of the 49 accusative case is governed by the prepositions ad or inter; as, Ready to hear. Attentive in time of teaching. 5. The Gerund in do of 50 the Ablative case is governed by the Prepositions, a, ab, de, e, ex, or in; as, Punishment frightens from sinning. NOTE. That the Verb Capit, or caperunt, is sometimes "understood; as, Omnes mihi invidere; supple caperunt, They all began to envy me. Num. 46. This Dat. is frequently understood; as, Eundum est, (supple nobis) We must go. NOTE. That this Gerund always imports necessity, and the Dat. after it is the person on whom the necessity lies. Num. 47. 1. The Sub. are such as these, Amor, causa, gratia, studium, tempus, occasio, ars, otium, voluntas, cupido, &c. 2. The Adj. are generally verbals, mentioned Num. 14. Num 48. The Adj. of fitness is often understood; as, Non est solven, do; He is not able to pay, (supple aptus or par.) NOTE. That sometimes this Gerund is governed by a Verb; as, Epi- dicum quærendo operam dabo, I'll endeavour to find out Epidicus. Plaut. Num. 49. NOTE 1. That it hath sometimes, but very rarely, the Pro- position ob and ante; as, Ob absolvendum munus, For finishing your task. Cic. Ante domandum, Before they are tamed or broken, Virg. speaking. of horses. Y 106 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. 51 Vel sine Præpositione, ut Ablativus modi vel causæ; ut, Memoria + excolendo* augetur. t Or without a Preposition, as the Ablative of manner or cause; as, The memory is improved by exercising it. * Defessus sum † ambulando. I am wearied with walking. 52 6. Gerundia Accusativum re- 6. Gerunds governing the gentia vertuntur eleganter in Accusative are elegantly turn- Participia in dus, quæ cum suis fed into the Participles in dus, Substantivis in Genere, Numero which agree with their Sub- et Casu concordant; ut, Petendum est pacem. Tempus petendi pacem. Ad pentendum pacem. A petendo pacem. SUPINA. 58 1. Supinum in um ponitur post verbum motus; ut, * Abiit † deambulatum. stantives in gender, number, case; as, Petenda est pax. Tempus petendæ pacis. Ad petendam pacem. A petenda pace. SUPINES. 1. The Supine in um is put after a Verb of motion; as, He hath gone to walk. NOTE 2. That what was the Gerund in Dum of the Nominative with the Verb est, fuit, &c. becomes the Acc. with esse; as, Omnibus morien- dum esse novimus; We know that all must die. Num. 52. Add to these the Gerunds of Fungor, fruor, and potior. These Participles in Dus are commonly called GERUNDIVES. NOTE 1. That the Sub. must always be of the same Case that the Gerund was of. NOTE 2. That because of its noisy sound, the Gerund in Dr is seldom changed into the Gen. Plural; but either the Acc. is retained; as, Stu- dio patres vestros videndi, rather than Patrum vestrorum videndorum; or it is turned into the genitive plural, without changing the gerund; as, Patrum vestrorum videndi studio. Thus Valla and Farnabius; but see my Gram. maj. vol. 2. p. 276. Num. 53. The Supine in um is elegantly used with the Verb 10, when we signify that one sets himself about the doing of a thing; as, In mea vita tu laudem is quæsitum? Are you going to advance your reputation at the hazard of my life? Ter. And this is the reason why this Supine with iri taken impersonally supplies the place of the future of the Infin. Passive. SOME GENERAL REMARKS ON THE CONSTRUCTION OF PARTI- CIPLES, GERUNDS, AND SUPINES. NOTE 1. That Participles, Gerunds, and Supines, have a two-fold con- struction; one as they partake of the nature of Verbs, by which they govern a certain Case after them; another as they partake of the nature of Nouns, and consequently are subject to the same rules with them; thus, 1. A Participle is always an Adj. agreeing with its Sub. by Aum, 1. PART III. CHAP. 1. OF CONSTRUCTION. 107 2. Supinum in u ponitur post nomen Adjectivum ; ut, * Facile † dictu. 十 ​§ 4. Constructio circumstantia- rum. 1. Causa, modus, et instrumen- tum. REG. XII. ‡ CAUSA, modus et instru- mentum ponuntur in ablativo; ut, *Palleo metu. *Fecit suot more. *Scribo † calămo. 2. LOCUS. REG. XIII. 1. NOMEN oppidi ponitur in genitivo, cum quæstio it per ubi; ut, * Vixit + Romæ. * Mortuus est † Londīni. 2. The Supine in u is put 54 after an Adj. Noun; as, Easy to tell, or to be told. $4. The Construction of Cir- cumstances. (a) 1. The cause, manner, and instrument. RULE XII. THE cause, manner and 55 instrument are put in the ablative; as, I am pale for fear. He did it after his own way. I write with a pen. 2. PLACE. RULE XIII. THE name of a town is 56 put in the genitive, when the question is made by ubi, (Where ;) as, He lived at Rome. He died at London. 2. A Gerund is a Sub. and construed as follows: (1.) That in dum of the Nom. by Num. 2. Of the Accus. by Num. 68. (2.) That in D1 by Num. 11, or 14. (3.) That in Do of the Dat. by Num. 16. Of the Abl. by Num. 69, 71, or 55. 3. A Supine is also a Sub. (1.) That in um, governed by ad understood by Num. 68. (2.) That in u, governed by IN understood by Num. 71. NOTE 2. That the Present of the Infin. Active, the first Supine, and the Gerund in DUM, with the Preposition AD, are thus distinguished: The Supine is used after Verbs of motion: The Infin. after any other Verbs: The Gerund in Dum with AD after Adject. Nouns. But these last are frequently to be met with after Verbs of motion; and poets use also the Infin. after Adj. NOTE 3. That the Present of the Infin. Passive and the last Supine, are thus distinguished: The Supine hath always an Adj. before it; which the Infin. hath not, unless (as I said) among poets. Num. 55. NOTE, 1. That the cause is known by the question Cur or Quare? Why? Wherefore? &c. The manner by the question Quomodo? How? And the instrument by the question Quocum? Wherewith? · (*) Adjective Nouns, but especially Verbs, have frequently some Cir- cumstances going along with them in discourse; the most considerable whereof with respect to Construction, are these five: 1. The cause or reason why any thing is done. 2. The way or manner how it is done. 3. The instrument or thing wherewith it is done. 4: The place where. And 5. The time when it is done. 108 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. 57 ‡ EXCEP. Si vero sit tertiæ declinationis, aut pluralis nu- meri, in ablativo effertur; ut, * Habitat + Carthagine. *Studiut+ Parisiis. 58 2. Cum quæstio fit per quo, nomen oppidi in accusativo regitur; ut, * Venit + Edinburgum. * Profectus est + Athenas. tt 59 3. Si quæratur per unde vel qua, nomen oppidi ponitur in ablativo; ut, t * Discessit + Aberdonia. * Laodicea iter + faciebat. EXCEP. But if it be of the third declension, or of the plu- ral number, it is expressed in the ablative; as, He dwells at Carthage. He studied at Paris. 2. When the question is made by Quo. (Whither,) the name of a town is governed in the accusative; as, He came to Edinburgh. He went to Athens. 3. If the question be made by Unde. (Whence,) or Qua, (by, or through, what place,) the name of a town is put in the ablative; as, He went from Aberdeen. He went through Laodicea. Ob NOTE 2. That the preposition is frequently expressed with the cause and manner; as, Pra gaudio, For joy. Propter amorem, for love. culpam, For a fault. Cum summo labore, With great labour. Per dede- cus, With disgrace. But the preposition (cum) is never added to the instrument: For we cannot say, Scribo cum calamo; Cum oculis vidi. NOTE, 3. But here we must carefully distinguish between the instru- ment, and what is called ablativus comitatus, or ablative of concomi- tancy, i. e. signifying that something was in company with another; for then the prep. (cum) is generally expressed, as, Ingressus est cum gladio, He entered with a sword, i. e. Having a sword with him or about him. NOTE, 4. That to cause some refer the matter of which any thing is made; as, Clypeus are fabricatus, A shield made of brass; But (except with the poets) the prep. is for the most part expressed. *" NOTE, 5. That to manner some refer the adjunct, i. e. something join- ing to another thing; as, Terra amana floribus, A land pleasant with flowers. Mons nive candidus, A hill white with snow. NOTE, 6. That to instrument some refer Conficior dolore, inedia, &c. Prosequor odio, amore, &c. Afficio te honore, contumelia, &c. La- cesso verbis asperis, &c. Num. 56. &c. NOTE 1. That the prep. is frequently added to names of towns, (especially when the question is Quo? Ünde? or Qua ?) and sometimes omitted to names of countries, provinces, &c. ¶ These rules concerning names of towns may be thus expressed. AT The name of a SIN or at town after To or UNTO FROM or THROUGI is put in the Gen. or abl. ‡ Accus. Abl. i. e. When it is of the third declension, or of the plural number. PART III. CHAP. I. OF CONSTRUCTION. 109 4. Domus et rus eodum mo- do quo oppidorum nomina con- struuntur; ut, 4. Domus and rus are con-60 strued the same way as names of towns; as, Manet domi, He stays at home. Domum revertitur, He re- turns home. Domo accersitus sum, I am called from home. Vivit rure or ruri, He lives in the country. Abiit rus, He is gone to the country. Rediit rure, He is returned from the country. 5. Nominibus regionum, pro- vinciarum et aliorum locorum, non dictis, præpositio fere addi- tur; ut, 5. To names of countries, 61 provinces and other places, not mentioned, the preposi- tion is generally added; as, UBI? Natus in Scotia, in Fifa, in urbe, &c. Quo? Abiit in Scotiam, in Fifam, in (vel ad) urbem, &c. UNDE? Rediit e Scotia, e Fifa, ex urbe, &c. QUA? Transit per Scotiam, per Fifam, per urbem, &c. ANNOTATIO. Distantia unius loci ab alio ponitur in accusativo, interdum et in ablativo; ut, Glasgua * distat Edinburgo triginta + millia passuum. Iter vel itinere unius diei. 3. TEMPUS. REG. XIV. 1. TEMPUS ponitur in ab- lativo, cum quæstio fit per Quando; ut, * Venit† hora tertia. The distance of one place 62 from another is put in the ac- cusative, and sometimes in the ablative; as, Glasgow is thirty miles dis- tant from Edinburgh. One day's journey. 3. TIME. RULE XIV. 1. TIME is put in the ab-63 lative, when the question is made by Quando, (When ;) as, He came at three o'clock. But when at signifies about or near a place, we make use of the prep. ad; as, Bellum quod ad Trojam gesserat, Virg. NOTE, 2. That Humi militiæ and belli are also used in the gen. when the question is made by Ubi? as, Procumbit humi, He lies down on the ground. Domi militiæque una fuimus, We were together both at home and abroad, or in peace and war, Ter. Belli domique agitabatur, Was managed both in peace and war, Sallust. NOTE, 3. That when the name of a town is put in the gen. in urbe is understood, and therefore we cannot say, Natus est Romæ urbis nobilis, but urbe nobili. Num. 63 and 64. These two rules may be thus expressed: 1. Nouns that denote a precise term of time are put in the abl. 2. Nouns that denote continuance of time are put in the accus. or abi. K X 110 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. | 64 2. Cum quæstio fit per 3. When the question is made Quamdiu, tempus ponitur in by Quamdiu, (How long,) time accusativo vel ablativo; sed is put in the accusative or abla- sæpius in accusativo; ut, tive, but oftener in the accusa- tive; as, * Mansit paucos † dies. Sex† mensibus* abfuit. De Ablativo absoluto. REG. XV. 65 SUBSTANTIVUM cum participio, quorum casus a nulla alia dictione pendet, po- nuntur in ablativo absoluto; ut, * Sole † oriente fugiunt tene- bræ. * Opere + peracto ludemus. He staid a few days. He was away six months. Of the Ablative absolute. RULE XV. A SUBSTANTIVE with a participle, whose case depends upon no other word, are put in the ablative absolute; as, The sun rising (or while the sun riseth) darkness flies away. Our work being finished (or when our work is finished) we will play. III. Constructio vocum indecli-III. The construction of words nabilium. 1. ADVERBIORUM. 66 1. ADVERBIA junguntur indeclinable. 1. OF ADVERBS. 1. ADVERBS are joined to verbis, participiis, nomini-verbs, participles, nouns, and bus, et aliis adverbiis; ut, other adverbs; as, He writes well. Bene scribit. Num. 65. NOTE, 1. This Abl. is called absolute or independent, be cause it is not directed or determined by any other word; for if the Sub. (which is principally to be regarded) have a word before that should govern it, or a verb coming after, to which it should be a Nom. then the rule does not take place. NOTE, 2. That having, being, or a word ending in ing, are the ordinary signs of this Abl. NOTE, 3. That (to prevent our mistaking the true substantive) when a Part. perfect is Englished by having, we are carefully to advert whether it be passive or deponent. If it be passive, we are to change it into being, its true English. If it be deponent, there needs no change, for having is the proper English of it. The use of this note will appear by the following example: James, having said these things, departed. James, these things being said, said,} Jacobus hæc locutus abiit. Dep. Jacobus his dictis abiit. Pass› PART III. CHAP. I. OF CONSTRUCTION. 111 Fortiter pugnans. Servus egregie fidelis. Satis bene. 2. Adverbia quædam tem- poris, loci et quantitatis regunt genitivum; ut, Pridie illius † diei. * Ubique † gentium. * Satis est † verborum. 2. Quædam adverbia deri- Fighting bravely. [ful. A servant remarkably faith- Well enough. 2. Some adverbs of time, 67 place and quantity, govern the genitive; as, The day before that day. Every where. There is enough of words. 2. Some derivative adverbs vata regunt casum primitivo-govern the case of their primi- rum; ut, † Omnium * elegantissime lo- quitur. Vivere * convenienter † na- tūræ. 2. PRÆPOSITIONUM. 1. PRÆPOSITIONES Ad, apud, ante, &c. accusativum re- gunt; ut, * Ad † patrem. 2. Præpositiones, A, ab, abs, &c. regunt ablativum; ut, * A † patre. 3. Præpositiones In, sub, su- per et subter, regunt accusati- vum, cum motus ad locum sig- nificatur; ut, Eo * in † scholam. * * Sub † monia tendit, Virg. Incidit super † agmina, Id. Ducit * subter † fastigia tecti, Id. tives; as, He speaks the most ele- gantly of all. To live agreeably to na- ture. 2. OF PREPOSITIONS. 1. THE prepositions Ad, 68 apud, ante, &c. govern the accusative; as, To the father. 2. The prepositions A, ab, 69 abs, &c. govern the accusa- tive; as, From the father. S. The prepositions In, 70 sub, super and subter, govern the accusative when motion, to a place, is signified; as, I go into the school. He goes under the walls. It fell upon the troops. He brings (him) under the roof of the house. Having promised a great reward. Pollicitus magnam mercedem. Dep. A great reward being promised. Magnâ mercede promissâ. Pass. NOTE, 4. That when there is no participle expressed in Latin, existente (being) is understood; as Me puero, I being a boy Saturno rege, Saturn being king. Civitate nondum libera, The state not being yet free. NOTE, 5. That the participle may be resolved into Dum, cum, quando, si, postquam, &c. (While, seeing, when, if, after) with the verb, either in English or in Latin, 112 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. ¶ But if motion or rest in a place be signified, in and sub 71 ¶ At si motus vel quies in loco significetur, in et sub re- gunt ablativum; super et sub-govern the ablative: super and ter vel accusativum vel abla- subter either the accusative or tivum ; ut, Abl. as, Sedeo vel discurro * in † schola. Recubo vel ambulo * sub † umbra. Sedens * super tarma, Virg. + Fronde * super virĭdi, Id. Venæ * subter † cutem dis- persæ, Plin. * Subter littore, Catul. I sit or run up and down in the school. I lie or walk under the sha- dow. Sitting above the arıns. Upon the green grass. The veins dispersed under the skin. Beneath the shore. The prepositions, with the cases they govern, are contained in the following verscs. 1. Hæ quartum adsciscunt casum sibi præposituræ. Ad, penes, adversum, cis, citra, adversus, et extra. Ultra, post, præter, juxta, per, pone, secundum, Erga, apud, ante, secus, trans, super, propter, et intra, Queis addas contra, circum, circa, inter, ob, infra. 3. Ha sextum poscunt; A, cum, tenus, abs, ab, et absque, Atque palam, pro, præ, clam, de, e, ex, sine, coram. -3. Sub, super, in, subter, quartum sextumque, requirunt. NOTE 1. That Versus and Usque are put after their cases; as, Italium versus, Towards Italy; Oceanum usque, As far as the ocean. But (as we have already observed, page 81.) these are properly adverbs, the Prep. ad being understood. NOTE 2. That Tenus is also put after its case; as, Mento tenus, Up to the chin. NOTE 3. That Tenus governs the Gen. plural, 1. When the word wants the singular; as, Cumarum tenus, As far as (the town) Cuma.-2. Whẹn we speak of things of which we have naturally but two; as, Crurum tenus, Up to the legs. NOTE 4. That a and e are put before consonants, ab and ex before vow. els and consonants; abs before t and q. NOTE 5. That subter hath very rarely the Abl. and only among poets. NOTE 6. That in English in is commonly the sign of the Abl. into of the Accus. NOTE 7. In for erga, contra, per, supra, ad, &c. governs the Accus. as, Amor in patriam. Quid ego in te commisi Quid ego in te commisi? Crescit in dies singulos. Imperium regum in proprios greges, Horat. Pisces in cænam empti. But in for inter governs the Abl. as, In amicis habere, Sallust. Sub for circa governs the Accus. as, Sub cænam. Super for ultra, præter and inter, governs the Accus. as, Super gara- mantas, Virg. Super gratiam suam, Sallust. In sermone super cenam nato, Suet. For de it governs the Abl. as, Super hac re nimis, Cic. • PART III, CHAP. I. OF CONSTRUCTION. 113 4. ¶ Præpositio in composi- tione eundum sæpe casum regit quem extra; ut, * Adeamus + scholam, * Exeamus + schola. 3. INTERJECTIONUM. § 1. INTERJECTIONES 0, heu et proh, regunt vocativum, interdum accusativum; ut, *O formōse † puer! * Heu † me misĕrum! § 2. Hei et Væ regunt dati- vum; ut, * Heit mihi! * Væt vobis. 4. CONJUNCTIONEM. * 1. CONJUNCTIONES Et ac, atque, nec, neque, aut, vel, | et quædam aliæ, connectunt similes casus et modos ; ut, Honōra † patrem * et † mo- trem. Nec † scribit, * nec † legit. 2. Ut, quo, licet, ne, ūtinam et dummodo subjunctivo modo fere semper adhærent; ut, Lego ut + discam. * Utinam † sapĕres. 4. A preposition oftentimes 72 governs the same case in com- position that it does without it; as, Let us go to the school. Let us go out of the school. 3. OF INTERJECTIONS. 1. THE interjections 0,73 heu and proh, govern the vo- cative, and sometimes the accusative; as, O fair boy! Ah wretch that I am! 2. Hei and væ govern the 74 dative; as, Ah me! Wo to you. 4. OF CONJUNCTIONS. THE conjunctions Et, ac, 75 atque, nec, neque, aut, vel, and some others, couple like cases and moods; as, Honour your father and mother. He neither writes nor reads. 2. Ut, quo, licet, ne, uti-76 nam and dummodo are for the most part joined with the subjunctive mood; as, I read that I may learn. I wish you were wise. Aum. 72. Notк, That this rule only takes place when the preposition may be dissolved from the verb, and put before the case by itself; as, Alloquor patrem, i. e. Loquor ad patrem. And even then the preposition is frequently repeated; as, Exire e finibus suis, Cæs. Num. 75. To these add Quam, nisi, prætarquam, an, and adverbs of likeness. The reason of this construction is because the words so cou- pled depend all upon the same word, which is expressed to one of them, and understood to the other. Num. 76. To these add all indefinite words, that is, interrogatives, whether Nouns, Pron. Adv. or Conjunc. when taken in a doubtful or indefi nite sense; such as, Quis, uter, quantus, &c. Ubi, quo, unde, &c. Cur, K.2 114 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. 1 SYNTAXEOS SYNOPSIS; SIVE, Genuinæ et maxime necessaria constructionis regulæ, ad quas cæteræ omnes reducuntur. AXIOMATA. 1. OMNIS oratio constat ex nomine et verbo. II. Omnis nominativus ha- bet suum verbum expressum vel suppressum. III. Omne verbum finitum habet suum nominativum ex- pressum vel suppressum. IV. Omne adjectivum habet suum substantivum expressum vel suppressum. Sex casuum constructio. I. OMNE verbum finitum, expressum vel suppressum, con- A SUMMARY OF SYNTAX; OR, The true and most necessary. rules of construction, to which all the rest are reduced. FIRST PRINCIPLES. I. EVERY speech [or sen- tence] consists of a noun and a verb. II. Every nominative hath its own verb expressed or un- derstood. III: Every finite verb hath its own nominative expressed or understood. IV. Every adjective hath its own substantive expressed or understood. The construction of the six cases. I. EVERY verb of the finite mood, expressed or understood, cordat cum nominativo, expres-agrees with its nominative, ex- so vel suppresso, in numero et pressed or understood, in num- persona; ut, ber and person; as, quare, quamobrem, num, an, anne, &c. (See page 80 and 84.) They general- ly become indefinites, when another word comes before them in the sen- tence, such as, Scio, nescio, video, intelligo, dubito, and the like; as, Ubi est frater tuus? Nescio ubi sit. An venturus est? Dubito an venturus sit. Ne the adverb of forbidding, requires the Imper. or Subjunc. as, Ne time, or ne timeas. See p. 56. Dum, quam, quod, si, sin, ni, nisi, etsi, etiamsi, priusquam, simulac, siquidem, quandoquidem, &c. are joined sometimes with the Indic. and sometimes with the Subjunc. PART III. CHAP. I. OF CONSTRUCTION. 115 Puer legit. [Homines] aiunt. Romani [cœperunt] festinare. II. Omnis genitivus regitur The boy reads. They say. The Romans made haste. II. Every Genitive is govern- à Substantivo expresso vel sup-ed by a Substantive expressed presso: ut, Liber fratris. Est [officium] patris. III. Dativus Acquisitionis ['i. e. cui aliquid acquritur vel adimitur] cuivis Nomini aut Verbo expresso vel suppresso jungitur: ut, Dedi Petro. Cui dedisti ? [Dedi] Petro. Utilis bello. Non est [aptus] solvendo. IV. Omnis Accusativus regi- or understood: as, The book of my brother. It is the duty of a father. III. The dative of acquisition [i. e. to which any thing is ac- quired, or from which it is taken is joined to any Noun or verb expressed or understood: as, I gave it to Peter. To whom did you give it ? To Peter. Profitable for war. He is not able to pay. IV. Every accusative is go- tur a Verbo activo, vel *Præpo-verned by an active verb, or a sitione expressis vel suppressis;* Prepositione expressed or un- ut, Amo Deum ; et (amo) parentes. Ad patrem. Abiit (ad) Londinum. Aut Infinitivo præponitur expressus vel suppressus; ut, Decit se scribere. Licet mihi (me) esse bonum. V. Omnis vocativus absolute ponitur, addità nonnunquam Interjectione O; ut, O Dave. Heus Syre. VI. Omnis Ablativus regitur a* Præpositione expressa vel suppressa; ut, A puero. Exullat (præ) gaudio. derstood as, I love God; and my parents. To the Father. He hath gone to London. ¶ Or is put before the infini- tive expressed or understood; as, He says that he is writing. I may be good. V. Every vocative is placed absolutely, the interjection O being added; as, O Davus. Come hither Syrus. * VI. Every ablative is gov- erned by a Preposition expres- sed or understood: as, From a Child. He leaps for joy. *See p. 71, and Larger Syntax, p. 117 and 118. 116 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. APPENDIX. I. OMNE Adjectivum concor- 1. EVERY Adjective agrees dat cum Substantivo expresso with a substantive expressed or vel suppresso, in Genere, Nu-understood in gender, number mero, et Casu; ut, and case; as, Bonus vir. Triste (negotium) II. Substantiva significantia eandem rem conveniunt in Ca- su; ut, Dominus Deus. III. Omnis infinitivus regitur a Verbo vel nomine expressis vel suppressis; ut, Cupio discere. Dignus amari. Populus (cœpit) mirari. A good Man. A sad thing. II. Substantives signifying the same thing agree in case; as, The Lord God. III. Every Infinitive is gov- erned by a verb or noun, expres sed or understood; as, I desire to learn. Worthy to be loved. The People wondered. EXPLANATION. ALL Construction is either TRUE or APPARENT, or, (as grammarians express it) JUST or FIGURATIVE. TRUE Construction is founded upon the essential properties of words, and is almost the same in all languages. APPARENT Construction entirely depends upon Custom, which either for elegance or dispatch, leaves out a great many words otherwise necessary to make a sentence perfectly full and grammatical. The first is compris- ed in these few Fundamental Rules, and more fully branched out in the larger Syntax. The other is also interspersed through the larger Syntax, but dstinguished from that which is True by a (‡.) The cases mentioned in the rules of the larger Syntax immediately dis- cover the rules of this Summary to which they respectively belong; those that are True without any ellipsis; those that are Figurative by having their ellipsis supplied as follows, as they are numbered in the Margin. Num. To RULE II, are reduced Num. 13. supple negotium. Num. 14 and 47, sup. de causa, gratiâ, or in re, negotio. Num. 15. sup. è numero. 21, sup. de negotio. Num. 22 and 23, sup. officium, negotium, &c. Num. 24, sup. 1. sat. taken from the Verb. 2. de causa, &c. Num. 29. sup. memorium, notitiam, verba, &c. Num. 30. sup. de crimine, pæna, &c. Num. 35 and 36, sup. pro re, or pretio eris. Num. 40. sup. inter negotia, and res (fert) se ad negotia. Num. 42. sup. res, negotium, &c. Num. 56, sup. in urbe. Num. 60, Domi, sup in ædibus. Num. 66, these Adv. seem to be taken for the Subst. nouns. To RULE III, is reduced Num. 73, sup. malum est; or these Interj. are used as Subst. To RULE IV, belong Num. 18, 53 and 62, quod ad. Num. 41. i. e. Est inter mea negotia; sup. ad. Num. 33, sup. Refert (or res fert) se ad PART. III. CHAP. II. OF RESOLUTION. 117 mea negotia, &c. Num. 58. sup. ad. or in. Num. 64. sup. per. Num 73 sup. sentio, lugeo, &c. Num. 51 and To RULE VI. belong Num. 12. sup. è, ex, or cum, &c. Num. 19, sup. pre. Num. 20. sup. de, è, ex, cum &c. Num. 21. sup. à, ab, &c. Num. 34. sup. pro. Num. 37, 38. sup. à, ab, de, è, ex. 55. sup. pra, cum, à, ab, è, ex, &c. sup. à, ab, è, ex. Num. 62. sup, in. sup. sub, cum, á, ab. Num. 54. sup. in or de. Num. 59. Num. 64. sup. in or pro. Num. 65, NOTE 1. That under verbs must also be comprehended participles, ge- Funds and supines, because the general signification of the verb is includ- ed in them. NOTE 2. That as a consequence of this, a learned grammarian ingeni- ously supposes that the Dat. and Infin. are always governed by a verb, and that when they seem to be governed by a Noun, the participle existens is understood; as, Utilis (existens) bello. Pollio præsidium (existens) reis. Dignus (existens) amari. NOTE 3. That the Voc. is properly no part of a sentence, but the case by which we excite one to hear or execute what we say. Therefore when the Voc. is put before the Inp. as frequently happens, the Nom. tu or vos is understood; and that even though these words be already expressed in the Voc. as, Tu Jacobe lege, i. e. O tu Jacobe, tu lege. NOTE 4. That the Voc. is sufficient to itself, and does not necessarily require the interjection O. See Vossius. Lib. VII. Cap. 69. and Sanc tius, Lib. IV. de Ellipsi Verb. Audio et Narro. CHAP. II. OF EXPOSITION OR RESOLUTION. EXPOSITION OF RESOLUTION is the unfolding of a Sentence, and placing all the parts of it, whether expressed or understood, in their proper or- der, that the true sense and meaning of it may appear. I. A SENTENCE is either simple or compound. 1. A SIMPLE sentence is that which hath one Finite verb in it. 2. A COMPOUND Sentence is that which hath two or more such verbs in it, joined together by some couples. These COUPLES are of four sorts, 1. The relative qui. 2. Some com- parative words, such as, tantus quantus; talis qualis; tam, quam, &c. 3. Indefinite words, (See page 86 and 113.) 4. Conjunctions. In a simple sentence there are two things to be considered, 1. Its Essen- tial. 2. Its accidental parts. 1. The essential parts of a sentence are a nominative and a verb. 2. The accidental parts are of four kinds, 1. Such as excite Attention, as the vocative and exciting particles; as, O, en ecce, heus, &c. 2. Such as serve to introduce a sentence, or to shew its dependence upon what was said before; as, Jam, hactenus, quandoquidem, cum dum, interea, &c. 3. Such as limit the general and indefinite signification either of the nominative or verb, and these are substantive nouns. 4. Such as qualify and explain them, viz. Adjectives, adverbs and prepositions, with their cases. Sometimes a part of a compound sentence supplies the place of those two last kinds of words. 118 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. II. The ORDER of words in a sentence is either natural or artificial. 1. NATURAL order is when the words of a sentence naturally follow one after another in the same order with the conceptions of our minds. ARTIFICIAL Order is when words are so arranged as to render them most agreeable to the ear, but so as the sense be not thereby obscured. III. A Sentence may be resolved from the Artificial into the natural or- der by the following rules: 1. Take the vocative, exciting and introductory words where they are found. 2. The NOMINATIVE. 3. Words limiting or explaining it, i. e, words agreeing with, or gov- erned by it, or by another successively (till you come to the verb) where they are found. 4. The VERB. 5. Words limiting or explaining it, &c. where they are found, to the end of the sentence. 6. Supply every where the words that are understood. 7. If the sentence be compound, take the parts of it severally, as they depend upon one another, proceeding with each of them as before. EXAMPLE. Vale igitur, mi Cicero, tibique persuade esse te quidem mihi earissimum: sed multo fore cariorem, si tulibus monumentis præceptisque læ- tabere. Cic. Off. lib. 3. Farewell then my (son) Cicero, and assure yourself that you are in- deed very dear unto me; but shall be much dearer, if you shall take delight in such writings and instructions. This compound sentence is resolved into these five simple sentences. 1. Igitur mi [fili] Cicero, [tu] vale, 2. & [tu] persuade tibi te esse quidem carissimum [filium] mihi; 3. sed [tu persuade tibi te] fore cariorem [filium mihi in] multo [negotio,] 4. si [tu] lætabere talibus monumentis, 5. & (si tu lætabere talibus] præceptis. NOTE 1. That interrogative words stand always first in a sentence, un- less a preposition come before them. NOTE 2. That negative words stand immediately before the verb. NOTE 3. That relatives are placed before the word by which they are governed, unless it be a preposition. NOTE 4. That the subjunctive mood is used in compound sentences. NOTE 5. That the parts of a compound sentence are separated from one another by these marks called interpunctions. 1. Those that are smaller, named clauses, by this mark (,) called a comma. 2. Those that are greater, named members, by this mark (:) called colon, or thuis (;) called a semicolon. 3. When a sentence is thrown in, that has little or no connexion with the rest, it is inclosed within what we call a parenthesis marked thus (). But when the sentence, whether simple or compound, is fully ended, if it be a plain affirmation or negation, it is closed with this mark (.) called a point. If a question be asked, with this mark (?) called a point of interrogation. If wonder or some other sudden passion be signified, with this mark (!) called a point of admiration. • PART IV. OF PROSODY. PROSODY teaches the quantity of syllables. The quantity of a syllable is the space of time taken up in pronouncing it. That part of grammar which treats of the quantity and accent of syllables, and the measures of verse, is called prosody. Syllables with respect to their quantity, are either long or short. A long syllable in pronouncing requires double the time of a short; as, tĕndĕrě. Some syllables are common. A common syllable is that which, in verse, is sometimes long, and sometimes short; as the second syllable in volucris. A vowel is said to be long or short by nature, which is always so by custom. In pollysyllables or long words, the last syllable except one is called the penultima, or by contraction, the penult, and the last syllable except two, the antepenultima. When the quantity of a syllable is not fixed by some particular rule, it is said to be long or short by authority, that is, according to the usage of the poets. Thus le in lego is said to be short by authority, because it is always made short by the Latin poets. In most Latin words of one or two syllables, according to our manner of pronouncing, we can hardly distinguish by the ear a long syllable from a short. Thus le in lego and lēgi seem to be sounded equally long; but when we pronounce them in composi- tion, the difference is obvious; thus, perlego, perlēgi. The rules of quantity are either general or special. The former apply to all syllables, the latter only to some certain syllables. GENERAL RULES. 1. A vowel before another vowel is short; as, Meus, alius : so nihil; h_in_verse being considered only as a breathing. In like manner in English create, běhave. Except. 1. I is long in fio, fiebam, &c. unless when followed by r; as, fieri, fierim. Except. 2. E having an i before and after it, in the fifth de- clension, is long; as, speciei. So is the first syllable in aer, dius, theu, and the penultima in aulai, terrai, &c. in Pompei, 120 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. Cai, and such like words; but we sometimes find Pompei in two syllables. Except. 3. The first syllable in ohe and Diana is common; so likewise is the penult of genitives in ius; as, illius, unius, &c. to be read long in prose. Alius in the genitive is always long; alterius, short. In Greek words, a vowel before another is sometimes short; as, Danče, idea, Simõis, &c.: sometimes long; as, Lycaon, Cytherea, Medea, Darius, Amphion, Ixion, Elegia, Antiochi, Alexandria, &c. But chorea, platea, canopeum, and Malea, a proper name, are common. In English it is also often lengthened; as in science idea. 2. A vowel before two consonants, or before a double conso- nant, is long (by position, as it is called); as, ārma, fāllo, āxis, gaza, major; the compounds of jugam excepted; as, bījŭgus, quadrijŭgus, &c. When the foregoing word ends in a short vowel, and the fol- lowing begins with two consonants or a double one, that vowel is sometimes lengthened by position; as, Ferti citi flammas, date vela, scandite morus. Virg. But this rarely occurs. A vowel before a mute and a liquid is common; as the first syllable in agris, and the middle in pharetra, podagra; but in prose we usually pronounce it short. To make this rule hold, three things are requisite. The vowel must be naturally short, the mute must go before the liquid, and be in the same syllable with it. Thus, a in patris is made com- mon in verse, because a in pater is naturally short, or always so by custom but a in matris is always long, because long by na- ture or custom in mater. In like manner the penult in salubris, ambulācrum, is always long; because they are derived from satūs, salūtis, ambulatum. So a in arte, abluo, &c. is long by position, because the mute and the liquid are in different sylla- bles. L and r only are considered as liquids in Latin words: m and n do not take place except in Greek words. 3. A contracted syllable is long; as, cogo, for coăgo; alius for aliius; tibicen, for tibiicen; it, for iit; sōdes, for si audes; nōlo, for non volo; bīgæ, for bijuga, &c. 4. A diphthong is always long; as, Aurum, Cæsar, Eubœa, &c. Only pro in composition before a vowel is short; as, præire. We often find two vowels in the same syllable short; as, lin- PART IV. OF PROSODY. 121 quimus, sanguinis, &c.; but these commonly are not reckoned diphthongs, perhaps improperly. In English we pronounce several of the diphthongs short, by sinking the sound of one vowel; but then there is properly ro diphthong. SPECIAL RULES. 1. Concerning the FIRST and MIDDLE SYLLABLES. Preterites and Supines of two Syllables. 5. Preterites of two syllables lengthen the former syllable as Vēni, vīdi, vīci. Except these six, bibi, scidi, from scindo; fidi, from findo; tŭli, dědi, stěti. 6. Supines of two syllables lengthen the former syllable; as, Vīsum, cāsum, mōtum. : Except sătum, from sĕro; citum from cieo, litum, from lino ; situm, from sino; stătum, from sisto; itum, from eo; dătum, from do; rutum, from the compounds of ruo; quitum, from queo; rătus, from reor. Preterites doubled. 7. Preterites which double the first syllable, have both the first syllables short; as, Cěcidi, tětīgi, pěpůli, pěpěri, didĭci, tu- tădi: except cěcīdi, from cædo; pepudi, from pēdo; and when two consonants intervene; as, fefelli, tětendi, &c. INCREASE OF NOUNS. A noun is said to increase, when it has more syllables in any of the oblique cases than in the nominative; as, rex, rēgis. Here re is called the increase or crement, and goes through all the other cases. The last syllable is never esteemed a cre- ment. Some nouns have a double increase, that is, increase by more syllables than one; as, iter, itĭnĕris. A noun in the plural is said to increase, when in any case it has more syllables than the genitive singular; as, gener, genĕri, genĕrōrum. Nouns of the first, fourth, and fifth declensions, do not in- crease in the singular number, unless when one vowel comes before another; as, fructus, fractui,; res, rei; which fall under Rule 1. L 122 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. Second Declension. 8. Nouns of the second declension which increase, shorten the penultima; as, Gener, genĕri; vir, viri; satur, saturi: except Iber, Ibēri, and its compound Celtiber, Celtibēri. Third Declension. Nouns of the third declension which increase, make a and o long; e, i, and u short; as, Pietatis, honōris; muliĕris, lapi- dis, murmuris. The chief exceptions from this rule are marked under the formation of the genitive in the third declension. But here per- haps it may be proper to be more particular. A.. A noun in a shortens atis in the genitive; as, dogma, àtis; poema -ătis. 0. O shortens inis, but lengthens enis and ōnis; as, Cardo, -inis; Virgo, -inis: Anio, -ēnis; Cicero, -ōnis. Gentile or partial nouns vary their quantity. Most of them shorten the genitive; as, Macedo, -ōnis; Saxo, -ōnis: Some are long; as, Suessiōnis, Vettōnes. Brittones is common. I. C. D. I shortens itis; Hydromeli,- itis. Ec lengthens -ecis; as, Ha- lec, -ēcis. A noun in d shortens the crement; as, David, -idis. L. Masculines in al shorten ălis; as, Sal, sălis; Hannibal, -ălis ; but neuters lengthen it; as, animal, -ālis. Sõlis from Sol is long; also Hebrew words in el; as, Michael, -ēlis. Other nouns in I shorten the crement; as, Vigil, -ilis; consul, -ŭlis. N. Nouns in on vary the crement. Some lengthen it; as, He- licon, -ōnis; Chiron, -ōnis. Some shorten it; as, Memnon, -õnis; Actœon, -õnis. En shortens inis; as, flumen, -inis; tibicen, -inis. Other nouns in n lengthens the penult. An anis; as, Titan, -ānis: En, -enis; as, Syren, -ēnis: in, inis; as, delphin, -inis: Yn ynis; as, Phorcyn, -ynis. R. 1. Neuters in ar lengthen aris; as, calcar, -aris. Except the following, bacchar, -aris; jubar, -aris; nectar, -ăris: Also PART IV. OF PROSODY. 123 the adjective par, păris, and its compounds, impar, -ăris; dis- par, -ăris, &c. 2. The following nouns in r lengthen the genitive, Nar, Nā- ris, the name of a river; fur, fūris; ver, vēris: Also Recimer, -ēris; Byzer, -ēris; Ser, Sēris; Iber, -ēris, are proper names. 3. Greek nouns in ter lengthen teris; as, crater, -ēris; cha- racter, -ēris. Except æther, -èris. 4. Or lengthens oris; as, amor, -ōris. Except neuter nouns; as, marmor, -ŏris; æquor, -ōris: Greek nouns in tor; as, Hec- tor, -ŏris; Rhetor, -ŏris: Also arbor, -ŏris; and memor, -õris. 5. Other nouns in r shorten the genitive; ar aris, masc. as, Cæsar, -ăris; Hamilcar, -ăris ; lar, lăris. Er eris of any gender; as, aer, aĕris; mulier, -ĕris; cadă- ver -ĕris; iter, anciently itiner, itineris; verběris; from the obsolete verber. Ur uris; as, vultur, -ŭris; murmur, -ŭriş. I'r yris; as, Martyr, -ÿris. AS. 1. Nouns in as which have atis lengthen the crement; as, pi- etas, -atis; Macēnas, -atis. Except anas, -ătis. € 2. Other nouns in as shorten the crement; as Greek nouns in ădis, -ătis, and ǎnis; thus, Pallas, -ădis; artocreas, -eătis; Melas, -ănis, the name of a river. So vas, vădis; mas, măris ; But vas, vāsis, is long. ES. Es shortens the crement; as, miles, itis; Ceres, ĕris; pes, pědis. Except locuples, etes; quies, ētis; mansues, ētis; hæres, -ēdis; merces, -ēdis. IS. Nouns in is shorten the crement; as, lapis, idis; Sauguis, this; Phyllis, -idis. Except Glis, glīris; and Latin nouns which have itis; as, lis, litis; dis, dītis; Quiris, -itis; Samnis, -itis: But Charis, a Greek noun, has Charitis. The following also lengthen the crement: Crenis, dis; Pso- phis, dis; Nesis, -idis, proper names. And Greek nouns in is, which have also in; as, Salămis, or -in, Salamīnis. OS. Nouns in os lengthen the crement; as, nepos, -ōtis; flos, flāris. Except Bos, bovis; compos, -ŏtis; impos, -ŏtis. US. Us shortens the crement; as, tempus, -ŏris; tripus, -ŏdis. 124 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. Except nouns which have udis, aris, and utis; as, incus, -ūdis; jus, jūris; salus, -ūtis. But Ligus has Ligŭrus; the obsolete pecus, pecudis; and intercus, -ŭtis. The neuter of the comparative has ōris; as, nelius, -õris. YS. YS shortens ydis or ydos; as, chlamys, -ÿdis, or ĭdos: and lengthens ynis; as, Trachsyt, -ýnis. BS. PS. MS. Nouns in S, with a consonant going before, shorten the penult of the genitive; as, cœlebs, ibs; inops, opis; hiems, ĕmis. Except Cyclops, -ōpis; seps, sēpis; gryps, gryphis; Cecrops, -õpis; plebs, plēbis; hydrops, -opis. T. T shortens the crement; as, caput, -itis. X. 1. Nouns in X, which have the genitive in gis, shorten the crement; conjux. ŭgis; remex, igis; Allobrox, ŏgis; Phryx, Phrygis. But lex, legis, and rex, regis, are long; and like- wise, frugis. 2. EX shortens icis; as, vertex, -icis: except vibex, īcis. 3. Other nouns in X lengthen the crement; as, pax, pācis ; ra- dix, -īcis; vox, vocis; lux lucis; Pollux, -ucis, &c. Except făcis, něcis, vicis, précis, calicis picis, fornicis, nivis; Cappadocis, præcocis, ducis, nucis, crucis, trūcis, onỹchis, Ery- cis, and many others, whose quantity can be only ascertained by authority. 4. Some nouns vary the crement; as, Syphax, -ācis, or ăcis; Sandyx, -icis, or icis. Increase of the plural number. 10. Nouns of the plural number which increase, make A, E, and 0 long; but shorten I, and U; as, musā, rērum, dominō- rum; regibus, portubus; except bobus or bubus, contracted for bŏvibus. INCREASE OF VERBS. A verb is said to increase, when any part has more sylla- bles than the second person singular of the present of the indisa- tive active; as, amas, amāmus, when the second syllable ma is the increase or crement; for the last syllable is never called by that name. A verb often increases by several syllables; as, amas, amābā- mìni; in which case it is said to have a first, second, or third, in- crease. PART IV. OF PROSODY. 125 11. In the increase of verbs, a, e, and o are long; i, and short; as, Amare, docēre, amātōte; legimus, sumus, volumus. Except do, and its compounds of the first conjugation, which have the first increase short; as, dăre, dămus, dabāmus, circun dăre, venundăbo, &c. The poets sometimes shorten děděrunt and stětěrunt; and lengthen rimus and rītis, in the future of the subjunctive: as transieritis aquas, Ovid. All the other exceptions from this rule are marked in the formation of the verb. The first or middle syllable of words, which do not come un- der any of the foregoing rules, are said to be long or short by au- thority; and their quantity can only be discovered from the usage of the poets, which is the most certain of all rules. In the first and middle syllables of words, however, the most frequent mistakes in quantity are committed. They therefore merit particular attention. REMARKS ON THE QUANTITY OF SOME OTHER FIRST AND MIDDLE SYLLABLES OF WORDS. 1. Patronymics in ides and ades usually shorten the penult; as, Priamides, Atlantiădes, &c. Unless they come from nouns in gus; as, Pelides, Tydides, &c. 2. Patronymics, and similar words, in ais, eis, itis, ois, otis, ine, and one, commonly lengthen the penult; as, Achais, Ptole- mais, Chrysēis, Eneis, Memphītis, Latōis, Icariotos, Nerine, Arisione. Except Thebais and Phocais, and Nereis, which are common. 3. Adjectives in acus, icus, idus, and imus, for the most part shorten the penult; as, Egyptiacus, academicus, lepidus, legi- timus; also superlatives; as, fortisimus, &c. Except, opacus, amicus, apricus, pudieus, medicus, posticus, fidus, infidus (but perfidus, of per and fides, is short) bimus, quadrimus, patrī- mus, matrimus, opimus; and two superlatives, imus primus. 4. Adjectives in alis, anus, arus, ivus, orus, osus, lengthen the penult; as, dotālis urbānus, avārus, œstīvus, decōrus, aren~ ōsus. Except barbărus opipărus. 5. Verbal adjectives in ilis shorten the penult; as, agilis fa- cilis, &c. But derivatives from nouns usually lengthen it; as, anīlis, civīlis, herīlis, &c. To these add, exīlis. subtilis; and names of months, Aprīlis, quinctilis, sextilis. Except humilis, parilis; and also, similis. But all adjectives in atilis are short; as, versa tilis, volatilis, umbratilis, &c. 6. Adjectives in inus derived from inanimate things, as plants, stones, &c.; also from adverbs of time, commonly shorten the L. 2 126 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. penult; as, amaracinus, crocinus, cedrinus, faginus, oleaginus; adamantinus, cristallinus, crastinus, pristinus, &c. Other Adjectives in inus are long; as, agīnus, bīnus, Latīnus, marīnus, supīnus, vespertinus, &c. 7. Diminutives in olus, ola, olum; and ulus, ula, ulum, al- ways shorten the penult; as, urceolus, siliola, musæolum: lectŭ- lus, ratiuncula, corculum, &c. 8. Adverbs in tim lengthen the penult; as, oppidatim, virītim, tribūtum. Except affatim, perpětim, and statim. 9. Desideratives in urio shorten the antepenultima, which, in the second and third person, is the penult; as, esŭrio, esŭris, es- ŭrit, but other verbs in urio lengthen that syllable; as, ligurio, ligūris; scaturio, scatūris, &c. 2. FINAL SYLLABLES. A. 12. A in the end of a word declined by cases is short; as, Musă, templă, tydeă, lampăda; except the ablative of the first declension; as, Musâ, Enēâ; and the vocative of Greek nouns in as; as, O Eneâ, O Pallá. A in the end of a word not declined by cases, is long; as, Amā, frustra, præterea, ergā, intrā: except ită, quiă, ejă, posteă, pută, (adv.) and sometimes, though more rarely, the prepositions contră, ultră, and the compounds of ginta: as, triginta, &c. E. 15. E final is short; as, Natě, seditě, patrě, currě, nempe, anté. Except. 1. Monosyllables are long; as, mē, tē, sẽ, except these, enclitic conjunctions quě, vě, rè; and these syllabical adjections, ptě, cě, tě; as, suoptě, hujuscě, turrě. Except. 2. Nouns of the first and fifth declension are long; as, caliõpē, Anchisë; fidē. So rē and die, with their compounds quare, hodie, pridie, postridie, quotidie; Also Greek nouns which want the singular; Cete, melē, tempē; and the second person singular of the imperative of the second conjugation; as, Docē, manē; but cave, vale, and vide, are sometimes short. Except. 3. Adverbs derived from adjectives of the first and second declension are long; as, placidē, pulchrē, valdē, con- tracted for validē; to these add ferme, fere, and ohe; also all adverbs of the superlative degree; as, doctissime, fortissimē: But bene and male are short. I. 14. I final is long; as, Domini, patrī, docerī. Except. 1. Greck vocatives are short; as, Alexi, Amarilli. PART IV. OF PROSODY. 127 Exccpt. 2: The dative of Greek nouns of the third declension, which increase, is common; as, Pullădi, Mínoždi, Mihi, tibi, sibi, are also common: So likewise are ibi, nisi, ubi, quasi; and cui, when a dissylla- ble, which in poctry is seldom the case. Sicubi and necubi are always short. 0. 15. O final, is common; as, Virgo, Amo, Quando. : Except. 1. Monosyllables are long; as, ō, dō, stō, prō; and the da- tive and ablative sing. of the second declension; as, librō, dominō : Also Greek nouns; as, didō and Athō the genit. of Athos and adverbs deriv- ed from nouns; as, certō, fulsō, paulō. To these add quo eō and their compounds, quōris, quōcunque, adeō, ideō; likewise iliō, idcircō, citrõ, intrō, retrō, ultrō: Except. 2. The following words are short; Egŏ, sciò, cedo, a defec- tive verb, homo, citò, illì cò, immò, duỡ, ambỡ, modo, with its compounds, quomodò, dummodo, postmodo; but some of these are also found long. U and Y. 16. U final is long; Y final is short; Vultu: Moly. B, D, L, M, R, T. 17. B, D, L, R, and T, in the end of a word, make the fore- going vowel short: as, Ab, apud, seměl, precor, capăt. M final anciently made the foregoing vowel short; as, Militum octo, Ennius. But by latter poets, m in the end of a word is always cut off, when the next word begins with a vowel; thus, miliť octo; except in compound words; as, circumago, circümen. The following words are long, sāl, sōl, nīl, pār, făr, lär, Nār, cūr, fur; also nouns which have ĕris in the genitive; Crutēr, vēr Ibēr, like- wise aer, ether: to which add Hebrew names; as, Job, Daniel, David. C, N. 18. C and N, in the end of a word are long; as, Ac, sic, nõn. The following words are short, nec and donec; forsitan, in, forsăn, taměn, ăn, vidến; likewise nouns in en, which have inis in the genitive; as, çurmền, criměn; together with several Greek nouns, as, Ilžon, Py- lön, Alexin. The pronoun hic and the verb fuc arc common. AS, ES, OS. 19. AS, ES, and OS, in the end of a word, are long; as, Mas, quies, bonos. The following words are short, anăs, ěs, from sum, peněs, čs, having ossis, in the genitive, compos and impos; also a great many Greek nouns of all these three terminations; as, Arcă and Arcădăs, hercăs, Phry- gès, Arcados, Teně dos, Melos, &c. and Latin nouns in es, having the penult of the genitive increasing short; as, Alès, hebès, obsěs. But Ce- rēs, pariēs, ariēs, abiēs, and pes, with its compounds are long. IS, US, YS. 20. IS, US, and, YS, in the end of a word, are short; as, Tur- ris, legis, legimus, annus, Capy's. Except. 1. Plural cases in is and us are long; as, Pennïs, librīs, nobīs, omnis for omnes, fruciûs, manûs: also the genitive singular of the fourth declension; as, portis. 128 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. Except. 2. Nouns in is are long, which have the genitive in ītis, īnis, or entis; as lis, Samnīs, Salamīs, Simoīs: To these add the adverbs gri- tīs, and forīs; the noun glīs, and vis, whether it be a noun or a verb; also is in the second person singular, when the plural has ītis; as, audīs, abīs, possīs; ris in the future of the subjunctive is common. Except. 3. Monosyllables in us are long; as, grūs, sūs; also nouns which in the genitive have ūris, ūdis, ūtis, untis, or odīs; as, tellūs, in- gūs, virtus, amăthūs, tripūs. To these add the genitive of the Greek nouns of the third declension; as, Cliûs, Supphús, Mantûs; also nouns which have u in the vocative; as, Panthūs. Except. 4. Tethys, is sometimes long, and nouns in ys, which have, likewise, yn in the nominative; as, Phorcys, Trachys. The last syllable of every verse is common; or, as some think, neces- sarily long, on account of the pause or suspension of the voice, which usually follows it in pronunciation. ୮ THE QUANTITY OF DERIVATIVE AND COMPOUND WORDS.. DERIVATIVES. 21. Derivatives follow the quantity of their primitives; as, Amicus, Auctioneer, Exǎlo from exul, -ūlis. pǎveo. from amo. auctio, -ōnis. Păvidus, Auctoro, auctor, -ōris, Quirīto, quiris, -ītis. Auditor, audītum. Radicor, Auspicor, auspex -ĭcis. Sospito, Caupōnor, caupo, -ōnis. Pávidus, Colōro, color, -ōris. Natura, radix, -īcis. sospes, -ītis. pǎveo. nātus. Cornicor, cornix, -īcis. Mäterus, māter. Custodio, custos, -ōdis. Lěgebam, &c. lego. Decōrus, decor, -ōris. Decōro, decus, -ŏris. Lěgeram, &c. lēgi.. EXCEPTIONS. 1. Long from short. Suspicio, from suspicor. Mobilis, from moveo. Sēdes, sědeo. Humor, Dēni, from děcem, Fōmes, föveo Humanus, homo. Sēcius, Segula, Rěgo. Pēnuria, pěnus. ! humus. júvo, &c. secus. Jūmentum, 2. Short from Long. vădo. fido. Arena and ǎrista, from areo. Lucerna, from luceo. Nota, Vădum, Fides, Sopor, duco. stābam. nōtus. Dux, -ucis Stăbilis, Ditio, sõpio. Quǎsillus, dis, dītis. quasillus, &c. COMPOUNDS. 22. Compounds follow the quantity of the simple words which compose them; as, Deduco of de and duco. So, profĕro, antěfero, consolor, denoto, dēpeculor, deprāvo, despéro, despūmo, desquamo, enōdo, ērůdo, exūdo, incēro, inhumo, investīgo, prægrăvo, prænăto, rělěgo, apăro, appāreo, concăvus, prægrăvis, dēsōlo, suffoco, diffidit, from diffindo and diffidit, from PART IV. OF PROSODY. 129 úffido, indico and indīco, permānet from permănco, and permanet, from permano, effodit in the present, and effodit in the perfect, so exedit and exēdit; devěnit and devenit; devěnīmus and devēnīmus; effugit and effugit, &c. The change of a vowel or dipthong in the compound does not alter the quantity; as, incido from in and cado; incido, from in and cado, suffō- co, from sub and faux, -aucis. Unless the letter following make it fall under some general rule; as, admitto, pĕrcello, dě osculor, prohibeo. Except. 1. Agnitum, cognitum, dējěro, pejěro, innŭba, pronŭba, male- dicus, veredicus, nihilum, semisõpītus; from nōtus, jūro, nūbo, dico, nīḥil, and sōpio: ambītus, a participle from ambio is long; but the substantive ambitus and ambitio are short Connubium has the second syllable common. Except. 2. The preposition pro is short in the following words: pro- fundus, profugio, profugis, proněpos, proneptis, profestus, profari, profi- teor, profānus, profecto, procella, protervus, and propago, a lineage; pro in propago, a vine-stock, or shoot, is long. Pro in the following words is doubtful, propago, to propagate, propino, profundo, propello, propulso, procuro, and Proserpina. Except 3. The inseparable prepositions se and di are long; as, sēpăro, dīvello: except dirimo, disertus. Re is short; as, re- mitto, rěfĕro: except the impersonal verb refert. Except. 4. E, i, and o, in the end of the former compounding word are usually shortened; as, nefas, neque, patefacio, &c. omnipotens, agricola, significo, &c. duodecim, hodie, sacro- sanctus, &c. But from each of these there are many exceptions. Thus i is long, when it is varied by cases; as, quidam, quīvis, tantidem, eidem, &c. And when the compounding words may be taken separately; as, ludimagister, lucrifacio, siquis, &c. Idem in the masculine is long, in the neuter short; also ubique, ibidem. But in ubivis and ubicunque, the i is doubtful. ACCENT. Accent is the tone of the voice with which a syllable is pro- nounced. In every word of two or more syllables, one syllable is sound- ed higher than the rest, to prevent monotony, or an uniformity of sound, which is disagreeable to the ear. When accent is considered with respect to the sense, or when a particular stress is laid upon any word, on account of mean- ing, it is called emphasis. There are three accents, distinguished by their different sounds; acute, grave, circumflex. 1. The acute or sharp accent raises the voice in pronunciation, and is thus marked []; as, prófero, prófer. 2. The grave or base accent depresses the voice, or keeps it in its natural tone, and is thus marked []; as, docte. This accent properly belongs to all syllables which have no other. 130 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. 3. The circumfler accent first raises, and then sinks the voice in some degree on the last syllable; and is therefore placed only upon long syllables. When written, it has this mark, made up of the two former [^]; as, amâre. The accents are hardly ever marked in English books, except in dictionaries, grammars, spelling-books, or the like, where the acute accent only is used. The accents are likewise seldom marked in Latin books, un- less for the sake of distinction; as in these adverbs, aliquò, con- tinuò, doctè, unà, &c. to distinguish them from certain cases of adjectives, which are spelled in the same way. So poētâ, gloriâ, in the ablative: fructûs, tumultûs, in the genitive: nostrûm, vestrum, the genitive of nos and vos: ergo, on account of: oc- çîdit, he slew; Pompili, for Pompilii; amâris, for amaveris, &c. VERSE. A verse is a certain number of long and short syllables dis- posed according to rule. It is so called, because when the number of syllables requisite is completed, we always turn back to the beginning of a new line. The parts into which we divide a verse, to see if it have its just number of syllables, are called feet. A verse is divided into different feet, rather to ascertain its measure, than to regulate its pronunciation. FEET. Poetic feet are either of two, three, or four syllables. When a single syllable is taken by itself, it is called a caesura, which is commonly a long syllable. Sponděus, Pyrrhichius, Iambus, Trochæus, 1. Feet of two syllables. consists of two long; as, omnēs. two short; as, děŭs. a short and a long; as, ămāns. a long and a short; as, sērvŭs. 2. Feet of three syllables. Dactylus, a long and two short; as, scrībĕrě. Anapœstus, two short and a long; as, piětās. Amphimăcer, a long, a short, and a long; as, charĭtās. Tribrachys, three short; as, dominŭs. The following are not much used. dēlēctant, Molossus, Amphibrachys, hõnōrě. Bacchius, Antibacchius, dŏlōrēs. pēllüntür PART IV. OF PROSODY. 151 Antispastus, Ionicus minor, Ionicus major, 3. Feet of four syllables. Alexandĕr. propĕrārānt. calcaribus. Pæon primus, Pæon secundus, Pæon tertius, temporibus. potentia. ǎnĭmātūs. Proceleusmaticus, hominibus. Pæon quartus, cělěrĭtās. Dispondeus, ōrātōrēs. Epitritus primus, võluptātēs. Dijambus, amænĭtās. Epitritus secundus, pœnitentēs. Choriambus, pontifices. Epitritus tertius, discordias. Ditrochæus, cantilēnă. Epitritus quartus, förtūnātus, DIFFERENT KINDS OF VERSE. 1. HEXAMETER. The Hexameter, or heroic verse, consists of six feet. Of these the fifth is a dactyle, and the sixth a spondee; all the rest may be either dactyles or spondees: Lūděrě | quæ vēl- lēm călă- | mō pēr- | misit ǎ- | grēstī. Virg. Infan- dūm, Rē- gīnă, ju- bēs rěno vārědo- lōrēm. Id. A regular Hexameter line cannot have more than seventeen syllables, or fewer than thirteen. Sometimes a spondee is found in the fifth place, whence the verse is called Spondaic; as, Cără Dě- | um sõbŏ- | lěs mā- | gnūm. Jovis | incrě- | měntūm. Virg. Sometimes there remains a superfluous syllable at the end. But this syllable must either terminate in a vowel, or in the consonant m, with a vowel before it; so as to be joined with the following verse, which in the present case must always begin with a vowel; as, Omnĭă | Mērcuri- | ō simi- | līsvō- | cēmque co- | lōrēmque Et flavos crines.- 2. PENTAMETER. Virg. The Pentameter verse consists of five feet. Of these the two first are either dactyles or spondees; the third always a spondee and the first and fifth, an anapæstus; as, Nātū- Carmini- tūr sē- ræ sequi- būs vī- vēs tēm- mină quis. | queě sūæ Propert. pus în ōm- ně měīs. Ovid. But this verse is more properly divided into two hemisticks or halves; the former of which consists of two feet, either dactyles or spondees, and a cæsura; the latter always of two dactyles and another cæsura: thus, Nātū- ræ sequi- | tūr Carmini- būs vi- vēs sẽmină tempus in omně mè- | is quisque su. x. 3. ASCLEPIADEAN. The Asclepiadean verse consists of four feet; to wit, a spondee, twice a choriambus, and a pyrrhichius; as, Mæcē- | nās ǎtāvīs | ēdĭtě rē- | gibus. Hor 132 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. But this verse may be more properly measured thus: In the first place, a spondee; in the second a dactyle; then a cæsura; and after that two dactyles; thus, Mæce-nas ata-vis | edite regibus. 4. GLYCONIAN. The Glyconian verse has three feet, a spondee, a choriambus, and pyrrhichius; as, Nāvis | quæ tibi crē- | dĭtům. Hor. Or it may be divided into a spondee and two dactyles; thus, Navis quæ tibi | creditum. 5. SAPPHIC. The Sapphic verse has five feet, viz. a trochee, spondee, dactyle, and two trochees; thus, Intě- | ger vì- | ta, scělě- | rīsque | purus. 6. ADONIAN. Hor. An Adonian verse consists only of a dactyle and spondee; as, Jupiter |ūrgēt. 7. PHARECRATIAN. Horat. The Pharecratian verse consists of three feet, a spondee, dactyle, and spondee; thus, Nīgris | æquorǎ | vēntīs. 8. PHALEUCIAN. Horat. The Phaleucian verse consists of five feet, to wit, a spondee, dactyle, and three trochees; as, Summām nec mětů- | as di- |ēm, něc | ōptěs. 9. THE GREATER ALCAIC. Mart. The greater Alcaic, called likewise Dactylic, consists of four feet, a spondee or iambus, iambus and cæsura, then two dactyles; as, Virtus repūl- | sæ | nesciă | sordiæ. 10. ARCHILOCHIAN. Ilorat. The Archilochian iambic verse consists of four feet. In the first and third place, it has either a spondee or iambus; in the second and fourth, always an iambus; and in the end, a cæsura; as, Nēc su- mit, aut | pōnīt | sěcũ | rēs. 11. THE LESSER ALCAIC. Hor. The lesser Dactylic Alcaic consists of four feet, namely, two dactyles and two trochees; as, Arbitri-ō popŭ | lāris | aūræ. Hor. Of the above kinds of verse, the two first take their names from the number of feet of which they consist. All the rest derive their names from those by whom they were either first invented, or frequently used. There are several other kinds of verse, which are named from the feet by which they are most commonly measured; such as the dactylic, trochaic, anapastic, and iambic. The last of these is most frequently used. PART IV. OF PROSODY. 133 12. IAMBIC. Of Iambic verse there are two kinds. The one consists of four feet, and is called by a Greek name Dimeter; the other consists of six feet, and is called Trimeter. The reason of these names. is, that among the Greeks two feet were considered only as one measure in iambic verse; whereas the Latins measured it by single feet, and therefore called the di- meter quaternarius, and the trimeter senarius. Originally this kind of verse was purely iambic, i. e. admitted of no other feet but the iambus; thus, Dimeter, Inar- sit x- stuō- Trimeter, Suis Romu ět i-psă Rō- mă viribus réit. Hor. Id. But afterwards, both for the sake of ease and variety, different feet were admitted into the uneven or odd places, that is, in the first, third, and fifth places, instead of an iambus, they used a spondee, a dactyle, or an anapæstus, and sometimes a tribrachys. We also find a tribrachys in the even places, i. e. in the second place, and in the fourth; for the last foot must always be an iambus; thus, Dimeter, Canidi- ǎ trãc- Hor. Id. Hor. 4 tāvīt dǎpēs. Vidē- rě propĕ- | rāntēs | domūm. Trimeter, Quōquò | scèlē- | stī růĭ- | tĭs aūt | cûr dēx-] tĕrīs. Păvidūm- què lěpŏ | r' aūt ād | vēnām | lăquěō | grůēm. Aliti- bus at- que căni- bus homi- | cid' He'- ctorēm. In comic writers we sometimes find an iambic verse consisting of eight feet, therefore called Tetrameter, or Octonari»s. Id. A verse which hath just the number of feet requisite, is called Versus Acatalecticus, an Acatalectic verse; if a syllable be wanting, it is called Catalesticus; if there be a syllable too much it is called Hypercatalecticus or Hypermĕter. NOTE. It is not of great importance, whether these names and several others of the same nature which follow, be remembered by the learner or not. They are here made use of, and explained, that they may not appear strange, when they occur in other books. COMBINATION OF VERSES. The different kinds of verses are variously combined in poems. A poem which has only one kind of verse, is called by a Greek name, Monocolon; that which has two kinds, Dicōlon; and that which has three kinds of verse, Tricolon. That which consists of two kinds of verse, and always after two lines returns to the first, is called Dicolon Distrophon; as when a single pentameter is alternately placed after a hexameter, which is named Ele- giac verse, because it was first applied to mournful subjects; thus, Flebilis indignos, Elegia, solve capillos. Ah! nimis ex vero nunc tibi nomen erit. Ovid. When a poem consists of two kinds of verse, and after three lines re- turns to the first, it is called Dicolon Distròphon; when after four lines, Dicolon Tetrastrõphon; as, Aurcam quisquis mediocritatem Diligit, tutus caret obsoleti Sordibus tecti; caret invidendê Sobrius aulâ. M Hor. 184 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. When a poem consists of three kinds of verse, and after three lines al- ways returns to the first, it is called Tricolon Tristrophon; but if it rç- turns after four lines, it is called Tricolon Tetrastrophon; as when after two greater dactylic alcaic verses are subjoined an archilochian iambic and a lesser dactylic alcaic, which is named the Carmen Horatianum, or Horatian verse, because frequently used by Horace; thus, Virtus recludens immeritis mori Cælum, negatà tentat iter viâ; Catusque vulgares, et udam Spernit humum fugiente pẽnnâ. Any of these parts of a poem, in which the different kinds of verse are comprehended, when taken by itself, is called a Strophe, Stanza, or Staff SCANNING. The measuring of verse, or the resolving of it into the several feet of which it is composed, is called Scanning; as, Spond. Dact. Spond. Spond. Dact. Spond. Felix qui potù- | īt rē- | rùm cōg- | nōscère | causas, &c. S. D. S. S. D. S. Illum | nōn popů- | li fa- | scēs nōn | pūrpără | rēgām. D. S. 1. S. D. S. Flexit, ět infi- | dōs ägi- | tāns dīs- | cōrdia | frâtrēs. FIGURES IN SCANNING. Lucret. The several changes made upon words to adapt them to the verse, are called Figures in Scanning. The chief of these are the Synalapha, Ec- thlipsis, Synarěsis, Diærěsis, Systole and Diastole. 1. Synalapha is the cutting off of a vowel or diphthong, when the next word begins with a vowel; as, Conticuere omnes, intentique ora tenebunt. to be scanned thus, Cōnticu- |ēr' ōm- | nēs īn- | tēntī- | qu' ōră tě- | nēbānt. Virg. The Synalapha is sometimes neglected; and seldom takes place in the interjections, ô, heu, ah, proh, væ, vah, hei; as, O pater, & hominum, Divûmque eterna, potestus. Virg. 2. Ecthlipsis is, when m is cut off, with the vowel before it in the end of a word, because the following word begins with a vowel; as, 0 curas hominum ! 0 quantum est in rebus inune ? thus, O | cū- | rās hömi- } n, õ quân- | t’ est in { rebūs in { ane. Pers. 3. Synæresis is the contraction of two syllables into one, which is like- wise called Crasis; as, Phethon, for Phaethon. So ei, in deinde, Pom- þei; öi, in proinde; ëa, in aured; thus, Aureâ percussum virgâ, versumque venenis. Virg. PART IV. OF PROSODY. 135 4. Diaresis divides one syllable into two; as, Tröiæ, for Troja; Për- scus, for Perseus; milüus, for milvus. 5. Systole is when a long syllable is made short; as the penult in tule- runt; thus, Matri longa decem tulerunt fastidia menses. Virg. 6. Diastole is when a syllable usually short is made long; as the last syllable in amor, in the following verse ; Confidant, si tantus, amōr, et mania condant. To these may be subjoined the Figures of Diction, as they are called, which are chiefly used by the poets, though some of them likewise fre- quently occur in prose. 1. When a letter or syllable is added to the beginning of a word, it is called Prosthesis; as, gnavus, for navus; tetüli, for tuli. When a letter or syllable is interposed in the middle of a word, it is called Epenthesis; as, relligio, for religio; induperator, for imperator. When a letter or syl- lable is added to the end, it is called Paragōge: as, dicier, for diçi. 2. If a letter or syllable be taken from the beginning of a word, it is called Apheresis; as, natus, for gnatus; tenderant, for tetenderant. If from the middle of a word, it is called Syncope, as, dixti, for dixisti : deûm, for deorum: If from the end, Apocope; as, viden' for videsne; Intōni, for Antonii. 3. When a letter or syllable is transposed, it is called Metathesis; as, pistris, for pristis; Lybia, for Libya. When one letter is put for another, it is called Antithesis; as, faciundum, for faciendum; olli, for ill; voltis, for vultis. But what particularly deserves attention in scanning verse, especially hexameter, is the Cesura. Cesura is, when after a foot is completed, there remains a syllable at the end of a word to begin a new foot; as, S. D. S. At re-gină gră-vī jām-dūdum, &c. The Casura is variously named according to the different parts of the hexameter verse in which it is found. When it comes after the first foot. or falls on the third half foot, it is called by a Greek name Triemimĕris. When on the fifth half foot, or the syllable after the second foot, it is called Penthemimeris: When it happens on the first syllable of the fourth. foot, or the seventh half-foot, it is called Hepthemiměris: And when on the ninth half foot, or the first syllable of the fifth foot, it is called Ennëemimĕris. All these different species of the Cesura sometimes occur in the same verse; as, Illě lä-tūs nĭvě-um mōl-li ful-tus hya-cinthō. Virg. But the most common and beautiful Cesura is the penthemim; on which some lay a particular accent or stress of the voice in reading an hexameter verse thus composed, whence they call it the Cœsiral pause; as, Tityre dum rede-O, brevis est via, pasce capellas. Virg. When the Casura falls on a syllable naturally short, it renders it long;' as the last syllable of fultus in the foregoing example. 136 RUDIMENTS OF THE LATIN TONGUE. The chief melody of a hexameter verse in a great measure depends on the proper disposition of the Casura. Without this, a line consisting of the number of feet requisite will be little else than mere prose; as, Rōmæ mania terruit împiger Hānnibal ārmīs. Ennius. The ancient Romans in pronouncing verse paid a particular attention to its melody. They not only observed the quantity and accent of the several syllables, but also the different stops and pauses which the par- ticular turn of the verse required. In modern times we do not fully per- ceive the melody of Latin verse, because we have now lost the just pro- nunciation of that language, the people of every country pronouncing it in a manner similar to their own. In reading Latin verse, therefore, we are directed by the same rules which take place with respect to English verse. All The tone of the voice ought to be chiefly regulated by the sense. the words should be pronounced fully; and the cadence of the verse ought only to be observed, so far as it corresponds with the natural ex- pression of the words. At the end of each line, there should be no fall of the voice, unless the sense requires it; but a small pause, half of that which we usually make at a comma. DICTA SAPIENTUM E GRÆCIS, D. ERASMO ROTEROD. INTERPRETE. ¿Aurea dicta, puer, quæ sunt hic, mente reconde ; Hinc poteris magna commoditate frui. DICTA PERIANDRI CORINTHII. OMNIBUS placeto. 'Bona res quies. Periculosa temeritas. Semper voluptates sunt mortales: Honores autem immortales. Amicis adversa fortunâ utentibus idem esto. Lucrum turpe, res pessima. Quicquid promiseris facito. Infortunium tuum celato, ne volup- tate afficias inimicos. Veritati adhæreto. Age quæ justa sunt. Violentiam oderis. Principibus cede. Opportunitatem exspectato. Mortalia cogita. Ne prior injuriam facias. Audi quæ ad te pertinet. Probrum fugito. Responde in tempore. Ea facito quorum te non possit pœni- tere. Ne cui invideas. Oculis moderare. Quod justum est imitare. Bene meritos honora. Spem fove. Calumniam oderis. Affabilis esto. Cum errâris, muta consilium. DICTA SAPIENTUM. 137. Voluptati tempera. A jurejurando abstine. Pietatem sectare. Laudato honesta. A vitiis abstine. Beneficium repende. Supplicibus misericors esto. Liberos instrue. Sapientum utere consuetudine, Litem oderis. Bonos in pretio habeto. Arcanum cela. Cede magnis. Ne efferaris gloriâ. Largire cum utilitate, Amicis utere. : Concordiam sectare. Diuturnam amicitiam custodia Magistratus metue. Omnibus teipsum præbe. Ne loquaris ad gratiam. Ne tempori credideris. Teipsum ne negligas. Seniorem reverere. Mortem oppete pro patria. Ne quavis de re doleas. Ex ingenuis liberos crea, Sperato tanquam mortalis. Parcito tanquam immortalis. Mortuum ne irrideto. Dilige amicos. Confule inculpatè. DICTA BIANTIS PRIENENSIS. ad opus accede. IN speculo teipsum contemplare; Quid sit autem ausculta. et si formosus apparebis, age quæ Prius autem intellige, et deinde deceant formam: sin deformis, quod in facie minus est vel deest, id morum pensato pulchritudine. Audito multa. Loquere pauca. De Numine ne male loquaris. Ne ob divitias laudaris virun indig- num. Persuasione cape, non vi. Compara in adolescentia quidem modestiam, in senectute verò pru- dentiam. DICTA PITTACI MITYLENÆI. QUE facturus es, ea ne dixeris; frustratrus enim rideberis. Depositum redde. Desidiosus ne esto. Infortunatum ne irriseris. Audito libenter. Ne lingua præcurrat mentem. Ne festines loqui. A familiaribus in minutis rebus læ- Nosce teipsum. Amico ne maledixeris. sus, feras. Immicum ne putes amicum. Uxori dominare [Christiane.] Legibus pare. Voluptatem coërce. Ne quid nimis. Inimicitiam solve. Quæ feceris parentibus, eadem a Ante omnia venerare Numen: liberis expecta. Inter amicos ne fueris judex. Ne contende cum parentibus, etiam- si justa dixeris. Ne geras imperium, priusquam pare- re didiceris. DICTA KE sis unquam elatus. Domûs curam age. Libros evolve. Parentes reverere. Quæ fieri non possunt, cave concu- piscas. Uxorem ducito ex æqualibus; ne, si ex ditioribus duxeris, dominos tibi pares, non af fines. CLEOBULI LINDII. Lapis auri index, aurum hominum; Quod oderis, alteri ne feceris. Voto nil pretiosius.- M 2 138 DICTA SAPIENTUM Justè judicato. Bonis benefacito. Liberos tibi charissimos erudi. A meledicentia temperato. Res amici diligas, ac perinde serves ut tuas. Inferiorem ne rejicias. Ne teipsum præcipites in discrimen. Citius ad infortunatos amicos, quàm ad fortunatos proficiscere. DICTA CHILONIS NOSCE te ipsum. Ne cui invideas mortalja. Temperantiam exerce. Turpia fuge. Tempori parce. Justè rem para. DEUM cole. Ne cui miniteris; est enim muliebrę. Suspicionem abjicito. Parentes patientiâ vince. Beneficii accepti memento. Aliena ne concupiscas. Mendax calumnia vitam corumpit. Mendaces odit quisque prudens et sapiens. LACEDÆMONII Sapientiâ utere. Multitudini place. Oderis calumnias. Ne quid suspiceris. Moribus probatis estg. Ne fueris onerosus. DICTA SOLONIS ATHENIENCIS. Parentes reverere. Amicis succurre. Veritatem sustinetą. Ne jurato. Legibus pareto. Cogita quod justum est. Iracundiæ moderare. Virtutem laudato. Malos odio prosequitor. DICTA THALETIS MILESII. PRINCIPEM honora. Amicos probato. Similis tui sis. Nemini promittito. Quod adest boni consulito. A vitiis abstineto. Gloriam sectare. Vitæ curam age. Pacem dilige. Laudatus esto apud omnes. Susurronem ex ædibus ejice. DICYNSII CATONIS. DISTICHA DE MORIBUS, AD FILIUM : Recognita de novo ad Metaphrasin Jos. Scaligeri, ejusdemque D. Erasmi. P. Scriverii et M. Zuer. Boxhornii Notus et Castiga, tiones, à T. R. IN USUM SCOLARUM. Illis que cecinit Themis aut Thymbræus Apollo, Non canit hicce catus deteriora Cato. PRÆFATIO CUM BREVISSIMIS PRÆCEPTIS. QUUM animadverterem quam plurimos homines garviter errare in via morum, succurrendum et consulendum eorum opinioni existimavi, max- imè ut gloriosè viverent, et honorem contingerent. Nunc te (fili charis- DISTICHORUM CATONIS. 139 sime) docebo, quo pacto mores animi tui componas. Igitur præcepta mea ita legito, ut intelligas; Legere enim, et non intelligere, negligere est. ITAQUE Dèo supplica. Parentes ama. Cognatos cole. Magistrum metue, Datum serva. Foro te para. Cum bonis ambula. Irasci ab re noli. Neminem irriseris. Miserum ne irriseriş. Mutuum dato. Cui des videto. In judicium adesto. Conjugem ama. Ad consilium ne accesseris, ante- Liberos erudi. quam voceris. Mundus esto. Saluta libenter. Majori cede. Minori parce. Rem tuam custodi. Verecundiam serva, Diligentiam adhibe. Libros lege. Que legeris memento, Familiam cura. Blandus esto. Bonis benefacito. Maledicus ne esto. Existimationem retine, Æquum judica. Parentes patientiâ vince. Beneficii accepti memor esto. Ad prætorium stato. Consultus esto. Utere virtute. Patere legem quam ipse tuleris, Pauca in convivio loquere. Convivare raro. Quod satis est dormi. Jusjurandum serva. Vino te tempera. Pugna pro patria. Nil temerè credideris. Tu te consule. Meretricem fuge. Literas disce. N.hil mentiri debes. Iracundiam tempera. Trocho lude. Aleas fuge. ( Nihil ex arbitrio virium feceris. Minorem te ne contempseris. Aliena concupiscere noli. Illiud stude quod justum est. Amorem libenter ferto. DISTICHORUM DE MORIBUS. LIBER I. Die cultus præcipuus. SI Deus est animus, nobis ut carmina dicunt.. Hic tibi præcipuè sit purâ mente colendus. Somnolentia vitanda. Plus vigila semper, nec somno deditus esto: Nam diuturna quies vitiis alimenta ministrat. Cohibenda lingua. Virtutem primam esse puta compescere linguam Proximus ille Deo, qui scit ratione tacere. 140 DISTICHORUM CATONIS. ' Sibi ipsi conveniendum. Sperne repugnando tibi tu contrarius esse: Conveniet nulli qui secum dissidet ipse. Nemo temere culpandus. Si vitam inspicias hominum, si denique mores, Cum culpas alios, nemo sine crimine vivit. Utilitas divitiis anteponenda. Quæ nocitura tenes, quamvis sint chara, relinque: Utilitas opibus præponi tempore debet. Mores pro tempore mutandi. Et* levis et constans, ut res expostulat, esto: Temporibus mores sapiens sine crimine mutat. Uxori non semper, assentiendum. Nil temere uxori de servis orede querenti : Sæpe etenim mulier, quem conjux diligit, odit. Instandum correctioni amici. Cumque mones aliquem, nec se velit ipse moneri,. Si tibi sit charus, noli desistere cœptis. Stulti verbis non vincuntur. Contra verbosos noli contendere verbis: Sermo datur cunctis, animi sapientia paucis.. Amicus sibi quisque primus. Dilige sic alios, ut sis tibi charus amicus Sic bonus esto bonis, ne te mala damna sequantur. Rumores spargere vetitum. Rumores fuge, ne incipias novus auctor haberi: Nam nulli taccuisse nocet esse locutum. Fides aliena non promittenda. Rem tibi promissam certo promittere noli: Rara fides ideo est quia, multi multa loquuntur. Judex quisque sit sui. Cum te aliquis laudat, judex tuus esse memento: Plus aliis de, te quam tu tibi credere noli. Beneficiorum ratio. Officium alterius multis narrare memento: Atque aliis cum tu benefeceris, ipse sileto. Senio bene gesta referenda. Multorum cum facta senex et dicta recenses, Fac tibi succurrent, juvenis quæ feceris ipse. Suspicionis labes. Ne cures si quis tacito sermone loquatur: Conscius ipse sibi de se putat omnia dici, al Cons- tans aut le- vis, repug nante metro. LIBER I 141 In prosperis de adversis cogitandum. Cum fueris felix, quæ sunt adversa caveto: Non eodem cursu respondant ultima primis. Mors alterius non speranda. Cum dubia et fragilis sit nobis vita tributa, In morte alterius spem tu tibi ponere noli. Animus in dono æstimandus. Exiguum munus cum dat tibi pauper amicus, Accipito placidè, plenè et laudare memento, Paupertas toleranda. Infantem nudum cum te natura creârit, Paupertatis onus patienter ferre memento. Mors non formidanda. Ne timeas illam, quæ vitæ est ultima finis: Qui mortem metuit, quod vivit perdit id ipsum. Amicorumi ingratitudo fugienda. Si tibi pro meritis nemo respondet amicus, Incusare Deum noli, sed te ipse coerce. Frugalitas. Ne tibi quid desit, quæsitis utere parce: Utque quod est serves, semper tibi deesse putato. Promissio iterato molesta. Quod præstare potes, ne bis promiseris ulli: Ne sis ventosus, dum vis bonus ipse videri. Ars arte deludenda. Qui simulat verbis, nec corde est fidus amicus : Tu quoque fac simile; sic ars deluditur arte. Blandiloquentia suspecta. Noli homines blando nimium sermone probare: Fistula dulce canit, volucrem dum decipit auceps. Liberi artibus instruendi. Cum tibi sint nati, nec opes; tunc artibus illos Instrue, quo possint inopem defendere vitam. Res quomodo æstimandæ. Quod vile est, carum ; quod carum est, vile putato; Sic tibi nec cupidus, nec avarus habeberis ulli. ·Calpata non facienda. Quæ culpare soles, ea tu ne feceris ipse: Turpe est doctori, cum culpa redarguit ipsum, Concedenda petenda. Quod justum est petito, vel quod videatur honestum : Nam stultum est petere id, quod poseit jure negari, 142 DISTICHORUM CATONIS. Nota ignotis non commutanda. Ignotum tibi tu noli præponere notis: Cognita judicio, constant, incognita casu. Dies quisque supremus putandus. Cum dubia incertus versetur vita pericilès, Pro lucro tibi pone diem * quocunque laboras. Obsecundandum amicis. Vincere cum possis, interdum cede sodali: Obsequio quoniam dulces retinentur amici. Amicitiæ mutua officia. Ne dubites, cum magna petes, impendere parva: His etenim rebus conjungit Gratia charos. Amicitia rixas odit. Litem inferre cave cum quo tibi gratia juncta est: Ira odium generat, concordia nutrit amorem. Castigatio sine ira. Servorum ob culpam cum te dolor urget in iram, Ipse tibi moderare, tuis ut parcere possis. Patientiâ vincendum. Quem superare potes, interdum vince ferendo : Maxima enim morum semper patientia virtus. Quæsita sunt servanda. Conserva potius, quæ sunt jam parta labore; Cum labor in damno est, crescit mortalis egestas. Consulendum sibi in primis. Dapsilis interdum notis, et charus amicis, Cum fueris felix, semper tibi proximus esto. LIB. II. PRÆFATIO. TELLURIS si fortè velis cognoscere cultus. Virgilium legito. Quod si mage nôsse laboras Herbarum vires, Macer has tibi carmine dicet. Corporis ut cunctos possis depellere morbos. Si Romana cupis et civica noscere bella, Lucanum quæras, qui Martis proelia dixit. Si quis amare velis, vel discere amare legendo, Nasonem petito. Sin autem cura tibi hæc est, Ut sapiens vivas, audi quæ discere possis, Per quæ semotum vitiis traducitur ævum, Ergo ades, et quæ sit sapientia, disce legende. De omnibus benè merendum. SI potes, ignotis etiam prodesse memento Utilius regno est meritis acquirere amicos. * al qui- cunque. LIBER II. 143 Arcana Dei non scrutanda. Mitte arcana Dei, cælumque inquirere quid sit : Cum sis mortalis, quæ sunt mortalia cura. Mortis timor gaudia vitæ pellit. Linque metum lethi, nam stultum est tempore in omni, Dum mortem metuis, amittere gaudia vitæ. Iracundia cavenda. Iratus de re incerta contendere noli: Impedit ira animum, ne possit cernere verum. Expendendum ubi opis est. Fac sumptum propere, cum tes desiderat ipsa : Dandum etenim est aliquid, cum tempus postulat aut res. Fortuna modica tutior. Quod nimium est fugito, parvo gaudere memento: Tuta magè est puppis modico quæ flumine fertur. Occulta vitia reticenda. Quod pudeat, socios prudens celare memento: Ne plures culpent id, quod tibi displicet uni. Occulta tandem revelantur. Nolo putes pravos homines peccata lucrari: Temporibus peccata latent, sed tempore *parent. Imbecillitas virtute compensatur. Corporis exigui vires contemnere noli: Consilio pollet, cui vim natura negavit. Cedendum potiori ad tempus. Cui sciêris non esse parem te, tempore cede : Victorem à victo superari sæpe videmus. Rixandum cum familiaribus non esse. Adversus notum noli contendere verbis: Lis minimis verbis interdum maxima crescit. Fortuna non quærenda sorte. Quid Deus intendat, noli perquirere sorte ; Quid statuat de te, sine te deliberat ipse. Luxus odium generat. Invidiam nimio cultu vitare mementó: *i. e. appa- rent, vulgo- patent, con- tra metri le- g'em. Quæ si non lædit, tamen hanc sufferre molestum est. Animus non deponendus ob iniquum judicium. Esto animo forti, cum sis damnatus iniquè: Nemo diu gaudet, qui judice vincit iniquo. Reconciliatis lis non refricanda. Litis præteritæ noli maledicta referre: Post inimicitias iram meminisse, malorem est. 144 DISTICHORUM CATONIS. Teipsum neque lauda, neque cúlpa. Nec te collaudes, nec te culpaveris ipse: Hoc faciunt stulti, quos gloria vexat inanis. Parsimonia. Utere quæsitis parcè, cum sumptus abundat: Labitur exiguo, quod partum est tempore longo. Supercilium nonnunquam deponendum. Insipiens esto, cum tempus postulat, aut res : Stultitiam simulare loco, prudentia summa est. Neque prodigus, neque avarus. + Luxuriam fugito; simul et vitare.memento Crimen avaritiæ: nam sunt contraria famæ. Loquaci parum credendum. Noli tu quædam referenti credere semper: Exigua iis tribuenda fides qui multa loquuntur. Ebrius vinum non accuset. Quæ * potu peccas, ignoscere tu tibi noli : Nam nullum crimen vini est, sed culpa bibentis. Amicis consilia credenda. Consilium arcanum tacito committe sodali: Corporis auxilium medico committe fideli. Successus malorum ne te offendut. Indignos noli suceessus ferre molestè: Indulget fortuna malis, ut lædere possit. Futuros casus prævidendos. * al potus. Prospice, qui veniunt, hos casus esse ferendos: Nam lævius lædit, quicquid prævidimus antè. Animus in adversus spe fovendus. Rebus in adversis animum submittere noli : Spem retine; spes una hominem nec morte relinquit. Opportunitas cùm contingit tenenda. Rem, tibi quam noscis aptam, dimittere noli: Fronte capillatá, post, est occasio calva. Futura ex præteritis colligenda. Quod sequitur, specta; quodque imminet, antè videto; Illum imitare Deum, qui partem spectat utramque. Vitæ ratio habenda. Fortius ut valeas, interdum parcior esto: Pauca voluptati debentur, plura saluti. Multitudini cedendum. Judicium populi nunquam contempseris unus: Ne nulli placeas, dum vis contemnere multos. LIBER III. 145 Valetudo curanda. Sit tibi præcipuè, quod primum est, cura salutis: Tempora ne culpes, cum sis tibi causa doloris. Somnia non observanda. Somnia ne cures : nam mens humana quod optat, Dum vigilans sperat, per somnum cernit id ipsum. LIB. III. PRÆFATIO. HOC quicunque voles carmen cognoscere, Lector, Quum præcepta ferat quæ sunt gratissima vitæ, Commoda multa feres. Sin autem spreveris illud, Non me scriptorem, sed te neglexeris ipse. Dandam esse operam literis. INSTRUE præceptis animum, nec discere cesses: Nam sine doctrina vita est quasi mortis imago. Moribus captanda fama. Fortunæ donis semper parere memento: Non opibus bona fama datur, sed moribus ipsis. Recte agendo aliorum linguam ne timeas. Cum rectè vivas, ne cures verba malorum : Arbitrii nostri non est quod quisque loquatur. Amici crimen "celandum. Productus testis, salvo tamen antè pudore, Quantumcunque potes, celato crimen amici. Blandiloquentia suspecta. Sermones blandos blæsosque cavere memento: Simplicitas veri * sena est, fraus ficta loquendi. * Scal. fama, Ignava vita fugienda. Signitiem fugito, quæ vitæ ignavia fertur: i. e. indicium al. norma. Nam cum animus languet, consumit inertia corpus. Animus fessus relaxandus. Interpone tuis interdum gaudia curis : Ut possis animo quemvis sufferre laborem. Malo animo neminem reprehendas. Alterius dictum, aut factum, ne carpseris unquam : Exemplo simili ne te derideat alter. Hæreditas augenda. Quod tibi sors dederit tabulis suprema notato Augendo serva; ne sis, quem fama loquatur. Senectus sit munifica. Cum tibi divitiæ superant in fine senecta; Munificus facito vivas, non parcus amicis. N 146 DISTICHORUM CATONIS. Verba attendenda, non os loquentis. Utile consilium dominus ne despice servi, Nullius sensum, si prodest, tempseris unquam. Præsenti utendum fortuna. Rebus et in censu si non est quod fuit antè, Fac vivas contentus eo quod tempora præbent. Uxor spe dotis non quærenda. Uxorem fuge ne ducas sub nomine dotis : Nec retinere velis, si cœperit esse molesta. Alieno sapere exemplo. Multorem disce exemplo quæ facta sequaris, Quæ fugias: vita est nobis aliena magistra. Nihil ultra vires. Quod potes, id tentes; operis ne pondere pressus Succumbat labor, et frustra tentata relinquas. Consentire videtur qui tacet. Quod nôsti haud rectè factum, nolito silere: Ne videare malos imitari velle tacendo. Rigor favore temperandus. Judicis auxilium sub iniqua lege rogato: Ipsæ etiam leges cupiunt ut jure regantur. Feras quæ tuâ culpa pateris. Quod merito pateris, patienter ferre memento: Cumque reus tibi sis, ipsum te judice damna. Multa legenda, sed cum judicio. Multa legas facito: perlectis * perlege multa: Nam mirando canunt, sed non credenda poëtæ. Modeste in convivio loquendum. Inter convivas fac sis sermone modestus : Ne dicare loquax, dum vis urbanus haberi. Iracundia uxoris non formidanda. Conjugis iratæ nolito verba timere : * al. neglige. Nam lachrymis struit insidias, dum fœmina plorat. Quæsitis utendum, non abutendum. Utere quæsitis, sed ne videaris abuti : Qui sua consumunt, cum deest, aliena sequuntur. Mors non formidanda. Fac tibi proponas mortem non esse timendam : Quæ bona si non est, finis tamem illa malorum est. Uxor proba, si loquax, ferenda. Uxoris linguam, si frugi est, ferre memento: Namque malum est te nolle pati, hanc non posse tacere. LIBER IV. 147 Pietas erga parentes. Aquâ diligito charos pietate parentes: Nec matrem offendas, dum vis bonus esse parenti. LIB. IV. PRÆFATIO. SECURAM quicunque cupis traducere vitam, Nec vitiis hærere animum, quæ moribus obsunt; Hæc præcepta tibi semper relegenda memento: Invenies aliquid quo* te nitare magistro. Divitiarum contemptus. DESPICE divitias, si vis animo esse beatus; Quas qui suspiciunt, mendicant semper, avari. Vivere secundiùm naturam optimum. Commoda naturæ nullo tibi tempore deerunt, Si contentus eo fueris quod postulat usus. Res ratione regenda. Cum sis incautus, nec rem ratione gubernes, * al. quo vi- tæ utare. al. tu te utare. Noli fortunam, quæ nulla est, dicere cæcam. al. non est. Âmor pecuniæ ad usum. Dilige § denarium, sed parcè dilige formam, § al. denari. Quam nemo sanctus nec honestus captat † habere. †al. ab aæțe: In valitudine ne opibus parcas. Quum fueris locuples, corpus curare memento: Æger dives habet nummos, ‡ sed non habet ipsum. ‡ al. sc. Castigatio peterna ferenda. Verbera cum tuleris discens aliquando magistri, Fer patris imperium, cum verbis exit in iram. Certa et utilia agenda. Res age quæ prosunt: rursus vitare memento In quibus error inest, nec spes est certa laboris. Libenter donandum. * Quod donare potes, gratis concede roganti: * al. ne vende, Nam rectè fecisse bonis in parte lucrosum est. al. lucrorum. Suspicio statim expendenda. Quod tibi suspectum est, confestim discute quid sit:] Namque solent, primo quæ sunt neglecta, nocere. Venus abstinentiâ cohibenda. Cum te detineat Veneris damnosa voluptas, Indulgere gulæ noli, quæ ventris amica est. Homo malus, fera pessima. Cum tibi proponas animalia cuncta timere, Unum hominem tibi præcipio plus esse timendum. 148 DISTICHORUM CATONIS. 1 Sapientia fortitudini præferanda. Cum tibi prævalidæ fuerint in corpore vires, Fac sapias; sic tu poteris vir fortis haberi. Amicus cordis medicus. Auxilium à notis petito, si fortè laboras : Nec quisquam melior medicus, quàm fidus amieus. Sacrificium spiritus dejectus. Cum sis ipse nocens, moritur cur victima pro te ? Stultitia est morte alterius sperare salutem. Amicus ex moribus diligendus. Cum tibi vel socium, vel fidum quæris amicum, Non tibi fortuna est hominis, sed vita petenda. Avaritia vitanda. Utere quæsitis opibus; fuge nomen avari: Quid tibi divitiæ prosunt, si pauper abundas. Voluptas inimica famæ. Si famam servare cupis, dum vivis, honestam : Fac fugias animo, quæ sunt mala gaudia vitæ. Senem etiam delirum ne irriseris. Cum sapias animo, noli irridere senectam: Nam quicunque senet, sensus puerilis in illo est. Opes fluxæ, ars perpetua. Disce aliquid nam cum subito fortuna recessit, Ars remanet, vitanque hominis non deserit unquam. Morês ex verbis cogniti. Perspicito tecum tacitus, quid quisque loquatur: Sermo etenim mores et celat et indicat idem. Ars usu juvanda. Exerce studium, quamvis preceperis artem; Ut cura ingenium, sic et manus adjuvat usum. Vitæ contemptus, Multum ne cures venturi tempora fati : Non metuit mortem qui scit centemnere vitam. Discendum et docendum. Disce, sed a doctis; indoctos ipse doceto : Propaganda etenim rerum doctrina bonarum est. Bibendi ratio. Hoc bibe quod possis, si tu vis vivere sanus: Morbi causa mali nimia est *quandoque voluptas, * al quæcun- Ne damnes quod probaveris. que. Laudâris quodcunque palàm, quodcunque probâris, Hoc vide ne rursus levitatis crimine damnes. f LIBER IV. 149 Circumspectus utrâque fortuna esto. Tranquillis rebus quæ sunt adversa* timeto: Rursus in adversis meliùs sperare memento. Studio crescit sapientià, Discere ne cesses: curâ sapientia crescit : Rara datur longo prudentia temporis usu. Parcè laudandum. Parcè laudato: nam quem tu sæpe probâris, Una dies, qualis fuerit, monstrabit, amicus. Discere non pudeat. Non pudeat quæ nesciéris, te velle doceri: * al caveto! Scire aliquid laus est, † turpe est nil discere velle. † al. culpa., Rebus utendum ad sobrietatem. Cum Venere et Baccho lis est, sed juncta voluptas: Quod blandum est, animo complectere, sed fuge lites. Tristibus et tacitis non fidendum. Demissos animo, ac tacitos vitare memento: Quâ flumen placidum est, forsan latet altiùs unda. Sors sorti conferenda. Cum tibi displiceat rerum fortuna tuarum, Alterius specta ‡ quo sis discrimine pejar. Ultra vires nihil aggrediendum. Quod potes, id tenta: nam littus carpere remis ‡ al qui sit! Tutius est multo, quam § velis tendere in altum. § al velum. Crm justo iniquè non contendendum. Contra hominem justum pravè contendere noli: Semper enim Deus injustas ulciscitur iras. Fortúna utraque æquè ferenda. Ereptis opibus noli tu flere querendo : Sed gaude potius, tibi si contingat habere. Ab amico quid ferendum. Est jactura gravis, quæ sunt, amittere damnis: Sunt quædam, quæ ferre decet patienter amicum. Tempori non confidendum. Tempora longa tibi noli promittere vitæ : al. si nil. Quocunque ingrederis sequitur mors, corpus ut umbra. Deus quibus placandus. *Thure Deum placa: vitulum sine crescat aratro : *al. Ture Ne credas placare Deum, dum cæde litatur. A potentioribus læsus dissimula. Cede locum læsus, fortune cede potenti: Lædere qui potuit, prodesse aliquando valebit. Castiga teipsum. Cum quid peccâris, castiga te ipse subinde : Vulnera dum sanas, dolor est medicina doloris. N 2 150 DISTICHORUM CATONIS. Amicus mutatus non vituperandus. Damnâris nunquam, post longum tempus, amicum: Mutavit mores: sed pignora prima memento. Beneficiis collatis attende. Gratior officiis, quo sis mage charior, esto: Ne nomen subeas quod dicitur † officiperda. † al. officiperde Suspicionem tolle. Suspectus cave sis, ne sis miser omnibus horis; Nam timidis et suspectis aptissima mors est. Humanitas erga servos. Cum fueris famulos proprios mercatus in usus, Ut servos dicas, homines tamen esse memento. Occasionem rei commodo ne prætermitas. Quamprimum rapienda tibi est occasio prima, Ne rursus quæras, quæ jam neglexeris antè. Non lætandum repentino obitu. Morte repentinâ noli gaudere malorum: Felices obeunt, quorum sine crimine vita est. Pauper simulatum vitet amicum. Cum tibi sit conjux, *ne res et fama laboret, Vitandum ducas inimicum no men amici. Junge studium. Cum tibi contigerit studio cognoscere multa; Fac discas multa, et vites † nil velle doceri. Brevitas memoriæ amica. Miraris verbis nudis me scribere versus ? Hos brevitas sensus fecit conjungere binos Dum manducatis, REGIMEN MENSÆ HONORABILE. *al. nec. fal. non.. NEMO CIBUM CAPIAT, DONEC BENEDICTIO FIAT. Vultus hilares habea- Sal cultello capia- Quod edendum sit, ne peta- Non nisi depositum capia- Rixas et murmura fugia- Manibus erectis sedea- Mappam mundam tenea- Stis. Ne scalpatis cavea- Aliis partem tribua- Morsus non rejicia- Modicum sed crebro biba- Grates DEO per CHRISTUM refera-J Privetur mensa qui spreverit hæc documenta. } RUDIMENTA PIETATIS. In nomine Dei Patris, Fillii et Spiritus Sancti.-Ameri;' ORATIO DOMINICA. MATTH. vi. PATER noster, qui es in cœlis. 1. Sanctificeter Nomen tuum. 2 Veniat Regnum tuum. 3. Fiat voluntas tua, quemadmodum in cœlo, sic etium in terra. 4. Panem nostrum quotidianum da nobis hodie. 5. Et remitte nobis debita nostra, sicut et nos remittimus debitoribus nostris. 6. Et ne nos inducus in tentationem, sed libera nos a malo: Quia tuum est regnum, et potentia, et gloria, in secula. Amen. SYMBOLUM APOSTOLICUM. CREDO in Deum Patrem omnipotentem, Creatorem cœli et terræ. 2. Et in Iesum Christum, Filium ejus unigenitum, Dominum nostrum. 3. Qui conceptus est de Spiritu Sancto, natus ex Maria Virgine. 4. Pas- sus sub Pontio Pilato, crucifixus, mortuus et sepultus, descendit ad in- ferna. 5. Tertio die resurrexit a mortuis. 6. Ascendit ad cœlos, sedet. ad dextram Dei patris omnipotentis. 7. Inde venturus est judicatum vi- vos et mortuos. 8. Credo in Spiritum Sanctum. 9. Credo sanctum Ec- clesiam catholicam, Sanctorum communionem. 10. Remissionem pecca. torum. 11. Carnis resurrectionem. 12. Et vitam æternam. Amen. DECALOGUS SIVE LEX DEI. Locuutus est DEUS omnia verba hec. EXOD. XX. EGO sum Dominus Deus tuus, qui eduxi te ex Ægypto, è domo servi- tutis. I. Non habebis deos alienos in conspectu meo. II. Ne sculpas tibi simulacrum, nec ullam imaginem effingas eorum, quæ aut supra sunt in cœlo, aut infra in terra, aut in aquis sub terra, neque incurves te illis, neque colas ea. Ego enim sum Dominus Deus tuus, fortis zelotes, vindicans peccata patrum in filios, idque in tertia et quarta progenie eorum qui oderunt me, et misericordiâ utens in mille- simam eorum qui diligunt me, et observant præcepta mea. III. Ne usurpes nomen Domini Dei tui temerè. Neque enim Dominus dimittet eum impunitum, qui nomen ejus vanè usurpaverit. IV. Memento diem Sabbati sanctifices. Sex diebus operaberis, et fa- cies omne opus tuum. At septimo die Sabbatem erit Domino Deo tuo. Non facies ullum opus, nec tu, nec filius tuus, nec filia tua, nec servus tuus, nec ancilla tua, nec jumentum tuum, nec advena qui est intra por- tas tuas. Nam sex diebus fecit Deus cœlum, terram, et mare et quæcun- que in iis sunt; requievit autem die septimo, ideoque benedixit diei Sabbati, et sanctificavit eum. V. Honora patrem tuum et matrem tuam, ut diu vivas in terra, quam tibi Dominus Deus tuus daturus est. VI. Non occides. VII. Non committes adulterium. VIII. Non fueraberis. IX. Non dices contra proximum tuum falsum testimonium. X. Non concupisces domum proximi tui, non concupisces uxorem proximi tui, nec servum ejus, nec. ancillam, nec bovem, nec asinum,. nec quicquam corum quæ sunt proximi tui. 152 RUDIMENTA PIETATIS. SUMMA LEGIS, MATTH. xxii. 34. PHARISÆI, quum audivissent quod IESUS silentium imposuisset Sad- ducais, congregati sunt pariter. 35. Et intcrragavit eum unus ex iis qui erat legis peritus, tentans eum, et dicens. 36. Præceptor quod præceptum, maximum est in lege? 37. IESUS autem dixit illi, Ut diligas Dominum Deum tuum, ex toto corde tuo, et ex totâ animâ tuâ, et ex omni cogitatione tuâ. 38. Hoc est præceptum maximum et primum. 39. Secundum autem est simile illi : nempe, Ut diligas proximum tuum sicut te ipsum. 40. Ex his duobus præceptis pendent Lex et Prophetæ, Quot sunt Christiana Ecclesiæ Sacramenta ? Duo. Quæ sunt illa ? Baptismus et sacra Coena Domini. INSTITUTIO BAPTISMI. Cujus hæc sunt verba.—MATT¤. xxviii. 19. Mark xvi. 16. ITE et docete omnes gentes, baptizantes eos, In nomine Patris, e Spiritus Sancti. Qui crediderit, et baptizatus fuerit, servabitur: Qui non crediderit, condemnabitur. Et docete eos ut custodiant quicquid mandavi vobis: et ecce ego vobiscum sum omnibus diebus, usque ad consummationem seculi. Hæc promissio repetitur, cum Scriptura Baptismum nominat Lavacrum regenerationis, et ablutionem peccatorum. Tit. iii. 5. Act. xxii, 16. INSTITUTIO COENÆ DOMINI. Cujus hæc sunt verba.—1 Cor. xi. 23. EGO eniin accepi a Domino nostro id quod tradidi vobis: Quod domi- nus noster Iesus Christus, eâ nocte quâ proditus est accepit panem : et, gratiis actis, fregit, ac dixit: Accipite, manducate, hoc est corpus me- um, quod pro vobis frangitur: Hoc facite ad memoriam mei. Itidem et po- culem, postquam cœnâsset, dicendo: Hoc poculum est novum illud fœdus per meum sanguinem: Hoc facite quotiescunque biberitis, in mei recordatio- nem. Quotiescunque enim ederitis panem hunc, et poculum hoc biberitis înortem Domini annunciabitis, usque quo venerit. Itaque quisquis ede- rit panem hunc, vel biberit poculum Dominum indigne reus est corporis et sanguinis Domini. Probet autem quisque se ipsum, et ita de pane illo edat, et de poculo illo bibat. Nam qui edit et bibit indigne, damnati- onem sibi ipsi edit et bibit, quia non discernit corpus Domini. Hæc promissio a Paulo exprimitur, cum inquit. POCULUM gratiarum actionis, quo gratias agimus, nome communio est sanguinis Christi? Panis quem frangimus, nonne communio est corporis Christi? Quoniam unus panis, unum corpus, multi sumus. Nam omnes unius panis participes sumus. GULIELMI LILII MONIT A PÆDAGOGICA ; SIVE CARMEN DE MORIBUS AD SUOS DISCIPULOS. QUI mihi discipulus, Puer, es, cupis atque doceri, Huc ades, hæc animo concipe dicta tuo. Mane citus lectum fuge, mollem discute somnum: Templa petas supplex, et venerare Deum. Attamen in primis facies sit lota manusque; Sint nitidæ vestes, comptaque cæsaries. Desidiam fugiens, cum te schola nostra vocârit, Adsis; nulla pigræ sit tibi causa moræ. Me Præceptorem cum videris, ore saluta, Et condiscipulos ordine quosque tuos. Tu quoque fac sedeas ubi te sedisse jubemus ; Inque loco, nisi sis jussus abire, mane. Ac magis ut quisque est doctrine munere clarus, Hoc magis is clarâ sede locandus erit. Scalpellum, calami, atramentum, charta, libelli, Sint semper studiis arma parata tuis. Si quid dictabo, scribes; at singula recte: Nec macula, aut scriptis menda sit ulla tuis. Sed tua nec laceris dictata aut carmina chartis Mandes, quæ libris inseruisse decet. Sæpe recognoscas tibi lecta, animoque revolvas: Si dubites, nunc hos consule, nunc alios. Qui dubitat, qui sæpe rogat, mea dicta tenebit; Is qui nil dubitat, nil capit inde boni. Disce, puer, quæso; noli dediscere quicquam : Ne mens te insimulet conscia desidiæ. Sisque animo attentus: quid enim decuisse juvabit, Si mea non firmo pectore verba premas ? Nil tam difficile est, quod non solertia vincat : Invigila, et parta est gloria militiæ. Nam veluti flores tellus, nec semina profert. Ni sit continuo victa labore manus : Sic puer, ingenium si non exercitet, ipsum Tempus et amittit, spem simul ingenii. 1 Est etiam semper lex in sermone tenenda, Ne nos offendat improba garrulitas, Incumbens studio, submissă voce loqueris; Nobis dum reddis, voce canorus eris. Et quæcunque mihi reddes, discantur ad unguem: Singula et abjecto verbula redde libro. 154 GUL. LILII CARMEN DE MORIBUS. Nec verbum quisquam dicturo suggerat ullum; Quod puero exitium non mediocre parit. Si quicquam rogito, sie respondere studebis, Út laudem dictis et mereare decus. Non linguâ celeri nimis, aut laudabere tardâ; Est virtus medium, quod tenuisse juvat. Et quoties loqueris, memor esto loquare Latinè; Et veluti scopulos barbara verba fuge. Præterea socios, quoties te cunque rogabunt, Instrue; et ignaros ad mea vota trahe. Qui docet indoctos, licet indoctissimus esset, Ipse brevi reliquis doctior esse queat. Sed tu nec stolidos imitabere Grammaticastros. Ingens Romani dedecus eloquii : Quorum tam fatuus nemo, aut tam barbarus ore est, Quem non auctorem barbara turba probet. Grammaticas rectè si vis cognoscere leges, Discere si cupias cultius ore loqui: Addiscas veterum clarissima scripta virorum, Et quos auctores turba Latina docet. Nunc te Virgilius, nunc ipse Terentius optat, Nunc simul amplecti te Ciceronis opus: Quos qui non didicit, nil præter somnia vidit, Certat et in tenebris vivere Cimmeriis. Sunt quos delectat (studio virtutis honestæ Posthabito) nugis tempora conterere: Sunt quibus est cordi, manibus pedibusve sodales, Aut alio quovis solicitare modo: Est alius, qui se dum clarum sanguine jactat, Insulso reliquis improbat ore genus. Te tam prava sequi nolim vestigia morum Ne tandem factis præmis digna feras. Nil dabis aut vendes, nil permutabis emesve, Ex damno alterius commoda nulla feres. Insuper et nummos, irritamenta malorum, Mitte aliis: puerum nil nisi pura decent. Clamor, rixa, joci, mendacia, furta, cachinni, Sint procul à vobis; Martis et arma procul. Nil penitus dices quod turpe, aut non sit honestum : Est vitæ ac pariter janua lingna necis. Ingens crede nefas cuiquam maledicta referre, Jurare aut magni nomina sacra Dei. FRAYERS, &c. 155 Denique servabis res omnes, atque libellos, Et tecum, quoties isque redisque, feres. Effuge vel causas faciunt quæcunque nocentem, In quibus et nobis diplicuisse potes. î TWO PRAYERS TO BE TAUGHT UNTO CHILDREN AT SCHOOL, WITH A FORM OF BLESSING GOD BEFORE AND AFTER MEAT. MORNING PRAYER. O GOD! I praise thee for the creation of the world, and for the re- demption of mankind by thy son Jesus Christ, and for thy many favours bestowed on me: Thou didst safely take me from the womb, and hast ever since cared for me; Thou hast afforded me the means of grace, and called me to the hope of glory. But, most merciful Father! I, a poor and miserable sinner, con- ceived in sin, and brought forth in iniquity, have gone astray from thee; I have not cared to know thee, and to do thy will, but have done my own will, and followed my own foolish and sinful inclinations, and do therefore deserve thy wrath and curse. O Lord have mercy upon me, turn me unto thee, and grant me repentance and forgiveness of all my sins for Jesus Christ's sake. Let it from henceforth become my chief care to please thee, and to seek thy kingdom and righteousness. Work in me a true faith, a lively hope, and a fervent charity; make me hum- ble, meek, patient, sober and just, and loving to all men, submissive and obedient to them that are over me, and well content and thankful in every condition of life. Grant that I may daily grow in the knowledge, love and fear of thee. Create in me a clean heart, O God! and renew a right spirit within me. I thank thee, O Lord! for thy care of me this night; watch over me this day; keep me mindful that I am always in thy sight; and grant that through the whole course of my life 1 may be holy and harmless in all manner of conversation; that when this short and frail life is at an end, I may be made partaker of everlasting life, through the merits of Jesus Christ, our Lord, in whose name and words I pray, Our Father which art in Heaven, &c. EVENING PRAYER. MOST gracious God! what shall I render unto thee for thy many and great benefits bestowed on me; Though I have been an undutiful and disobedient servant unto thee, thou hast continued thy care and kindness for me ever since I was born, and hast preserved me this day: Let me never forget thy goodness, but grant that thereby I may be led to re- pentance and amendment of life. Preserve me from every thing that is displeasing to thee. O Lord! keep me from cursing, swearing, and ly- ing,-from pride, stubbornness, and idleness. Work in me an utter 156 PRAYERS, &c. dislike of all uncleanness, of gluttony and drunkenness, of all malice and envy, of strife and contention, of deceit and covetousness. Give me grace to deny all ungodliness and worldly lusts, and to live godly, righteously and soberly in this present world. Cause me to undestand and consider the laws and life of thy son Jesus Christ, that I may do his will, and follow his steps. Let not the cares of this life, nor the love of riches, nor evil company, nor the corrupt customs of the world, with- draw me from the obedience of thy laws; but strengthen and establish me by thy holy spirit, that I may live and die thy faithful servant. : O Lord! send thy gospel through the world: pour out plenteously the spirit of truth, holiness and peace, on all people: bless the church and nation guide our rulers and magistrates: sanctify and assist the minis- ters of the gospel: Visit all that are in trouble, and sanctify their afflic tions to them be gracious to all my kindred, friends and neighbours ; and bless and forgive all mine enemies. Lord! watch over me this night, and keep me ever mindful that I am shortly to die and come to judgment, that I may without delay turn to thee, and pass the time of my sojourning here in thy fear.-Good Lord! hear me, and grant these my desires, and what else thou knowest to be needful for me, for the sake of Jesus Christ our Lord; in whose name and words I pray, Our Father, &c. GRACE BEFORE MEAT. O LORD, be merciful unto us, and pardon our sins; sanctify these thy good benefits, that we, by the sober and thankful use of them, may be enabled for thy service, through Jesus Christ our Lord and Saviour.- Amen. GRACE AFTER MEAT. WE thank and praise thee, O Lord, the giver of all good! who hast at this time fed our bodies: stir up in us a greater care for our souls; and grant that our short lives, which are so carefully sustained by thy bounty, may be spent in doing thy will. Lead us safely through this vain and sinful world, in which we are pilgrims and strangers, and at length bring us to everlasting rest through Jesus Christ.-Amen. FINIS 1 repaired & tied 1 Apr 81 • WILSON ANNEX AISLE 37 wils 475 R83 UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA Ruddiman, Thomas, 1674-1757. The rudiments of the Latin tongue: 3 1951 002 180 639 R 413 3 2 QUAWN EXTAWN-I 4 QUAWN-- 1 0123456 0123456 0123456 654321 A4 Page 8543210 AIIM SCANNER TEST CHART #2 4 PT 6 PT 8 PT Spectra ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",/?$0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:”,./?$0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:',./?$0123456789 10 PT ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789 Times Roman 4 PT 6 PT 8 PT ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:'../?$0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789 10 PT ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789 4 PT 6 PT 8 PT Century Schoolbook Bold ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789 10 PT ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789 4 PT 6 PT News Gothic Bold Reversed ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:'',/?$0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:',./?$0123456789 8 PT ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789 10 PT ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789 4 PT 6 PT 8 PT Bodoni Italic ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?80123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789 10 PT ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz;:",./?$0123456789 ΑΒΓΔΕΞΘΗΙΚΛΜΝΟΠΡΣΤΥΩΝΨΖαβγδεξθηικλμνοπορστνωχ ζ=7",/St=#°><ΕΞ Greek and Math Symbols 4 PT 6 PT 8 PT ΑΒΓΔΕΞΘΗΙΚΛΜΝΟΠΦΡΣΤΥΩΧΨΖαβγδεξθηικλμνοπφροτυωχψί=7",/S+=#°><><><= ΑΒΓΔΕΞΘΗΙΚΛΜΝΟΠΦΡΣΤΥΩΧ Ζαβγδεξθηικλμνοπόρστυωχψίπτ",./St##°><><><Ξ 10 ΡΤ ΑΒΓΔΕΞΘΗΙΚΛΜΝΟΠΦΡΣΤΥΩΧΨΖαβγδεξθηικλμνοπορστνωχ ίΞτ",/St=#°><><= White MESH HALFTONE WEDGES I | 65 85 100 110 133 150 Black Isolated Characters e 3 1 2 3 a 4 5 6 7 о 8 9 0 h B O5¬♡NTC 65432 A4 Page 6543210 A4 Page 6543210 ©B4MN-C 65432 MEMORIAL DRIVE, ROCHESTER, NEW YORK 14623 RIT ALPHANUMERIC RESOLUTION TEST OBJECT, RT-1-71 0123460 மய 6 E38 5 582 4 283 3 32E 10: 5326 7E28 8B3E 032E ▸ 1253 223E 3 3EB 4 E25 5 523 6 2E5 17 分 ​155自​杂 ​14 E2 S 1323S 12E25 11ES2 10523 5836 835E 7832 0723 SBE 9 OEZE 1328 2 E32 3 235 4 538 5 EBS 6 EB 15853 TYWES 16 ELE 14532 13823 12ES2 11285 1053B SBE6 8235 7523 ◄ 2350 5 SER 10 EBS 8532 9538 7863 ROCHESTER INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY, ONE LOMB PRODUCED BY GRAPHIC ARTS RESEARCH CENTER